Owner’s Manual
Issue Date: January 2023
Revision Date: February 2025
NOTE:
Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided
in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future
reference. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the use or
care of your vehicle, please visit your Authorised Mahindra
Dealer for assistance or advice.
This Owner's Manual should be considered as an integral part of
the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle.
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD., GATEWAY BUILDING, APOLLO BUNDER, MUMBAI - 400 039 www.mahindra.com
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.
We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.
Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety,
Precision Workmanship and Distinctive Styling , which are our
traditional values.
This documents contains important information on vehicle
operation, that will help you make full use of the technical
features available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest
you to please take time to read, understand and familiarise with
vehicle and its features. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, note that your Mahindra Authorised
Dealer knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical
Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your
satisfaction.
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.
| Important Information – Quick Reference | |
|
We strongly urge that you read the information
provided in pages referred hereunder which will
help in road safety and prevent inconvenience
|
|
1
|
Warranty
Coverage.............................................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 15)
|
|
2
|
Roadside Assistance
....................................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 10)
|
|
3
|
Schedule Service
(Free/Paid).................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 23)
|
|
4
|
Maintenance Schedule
Chart.................................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 24)
|
|
5
|
Lubricants And
Capacities.............................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 28)
|
|
6
|
Location Of Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 1-7)
|
|
7
|
Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse
Details............................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 10-10)
|
|
8
|
Changing A Flat
Tyre................................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 10-17)
|
|
9
|
Understanding The Warning
Lamps..........................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 3-35)
|
|
10
|
Use Of Seat Belts And Child
Restraint......................................
|
Refer (P.g. 2-12)
|
|
11
|
Understanding The Airbag
Function.........................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 2-27)
|
|
12
|
If Your Vehicle Is
Submerged.....................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 6-8)
|
|
13
|
Driving Through
Water..................................................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 6-8)
|
|
14
|
Opening And Closing the
Bonnet.........................................
|
Refer (P.g. 5-23)
|
|
15
|
Location Of Battery And Its
Maintenance.....................................
|
Refer (P.g. 11-8 & 11-16)
|
|
*Warranty and Service Information Guide
|
||
|
Note:
In view of our policy of continuously improving our
products, we reserve the right to alter specifications,
designs or features without prior notice and without
liability. We recommend you to refer the Variant
Matrix in the Brand official website or contact the
nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for the list of
features applicable to your vehicle.
|
||
|
The vehicle's software and security measures are
subject to ongoing development. Similar to computers
and mobile device operating systems, the software and
security features of the car might also receive
irregular updates.
|
||
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1.1 Servicing and Summary Data
We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the Warranty and Service Information Guide for future references
We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts when performing repairs on the vehicle.
For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of Genuine spare parts, contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer
1.2 Safety Symbols
Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ instructions given in this manual.
Legend of the Symbols
To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout
the manual:
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.
NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which particular
attention must be paid for optimum use of the vehicle.
|
If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do not,” “do not do this,” or “never”.
|
 |
1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions
| 1. | First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time. |
| 2. | Please note that throughout this manual, reference is made that “an accident” could occur. An accident could cause you or a bystander to sustain personal injury, or result in property damage. |
| 3. | Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. |
| 4. | The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified Technician . If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace, or have the component serviced. |
| 5. | The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference; hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate. |
| 6. | Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier. |
1.4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle
When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is
a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 kilometers.
of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Driving and Drugs/Medication
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even
cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.
Mobile Phones Warning
Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while
driving is dangerous. In exceptional condition, if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite this warning, use a handsfree
system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure distraction free drive. Please
comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles .
Driving Long Distances
When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe journey:
| • | Take breaks at regular intervals |
| • | Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely |
| • | Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road |
| • | Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea |
| • | Relax and stay calm |
Running-in
Driving smoothly during first 1,000 kilometers. will help to prevent abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in
will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000 kilometers. of running. This should be considered as a normal part
of break-in and not interpreted as any problem with the engine.
Mahindra Genuine Parts
Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that
you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be covered by your Mahindra warranty.
The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non genuine parts
Mahindra Genuine Accessories
A wide selection of quality accessories are available through your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have been
specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic
appearance.
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every
Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.
Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.
For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:
| • | The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised Dealer for specific weight information |
| • | Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended |
| • | Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of safety systems |
| • | Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer and can potentially affect the vehicle performance. |
Vehicle Safety
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
| • | Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle |
| • | In case of PKE, please lock and take the key fob with you |
| • | Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors |
| • | Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors |
When Sleeping in Your Vehicle
| 1. | Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to death |
| 2. | Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts |
| 3. | While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident |
| 4. | While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire |
Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode
and cause a fire.
Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar
with how to use it
When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can
while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or
railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe place quickly.
Do not Switch off the Engine While Driving
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the steering wheel heavier, influence the brake performance
and consequently dangerous
System Safety Mode : The protective measures including illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned off
in extreme case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This
indicates the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive system.
| • | If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your Mahindra dealer. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer according to the dealer’s instruction and have your vehicle checked by a Technician |
| • | If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage the drive system |
Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorised modifications are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during
the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered.
| • | The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests. |
| • | These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, may under perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life |
Protecting Our Environment: As a responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage
and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.
Body Repairs: If your vehicle is in a collision, contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer to ensure that it is repaired with Mahindra Genuine
Parts. Mahindra has collision repair centers that meet strict requirements for training, equipment, quality, and customer
satisfaction. Some repair shops and insurance companies might suggest using non-original equipment to save money. However,
these parts do not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In addition, non-genuine parts
or equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s systems.
End of Line Disposal
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, other plastics & miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable
by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings to be disposed as per local
pollution board regulations.
Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium & Iron phosphate with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful. They can impact on
environment and are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of this vehicle such as seat
belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be required for service or vehicle
end-of-life disposal.
Similarly ABS & other plastic panels, materials used are to be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.
Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous,
disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further information
1.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
|
VIN Plate |
VIN Punch |
 |
 |
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on
the VIN Table riveted on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on the driver side. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN
The vehicle identification number is also Punched on the floor under the driver seat of vehicle. Flip the cutout provided
in the carpet to view the VIN Punch.
Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.
1.6 Engine Number
|
Petrol |
Diesel |
 |
 |
The engine number is punched on the LHS face of the crankcase adjacent to the water pump.
1.11 Alexa Reference Guide
1.12 ADRENOX Connect
The Adrenox connect mobile app provides information in your mobile phone about location & status of the vehicle and allows
to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android and iOS platform. Kindly use the ADRENOX connect mobile app for connected car related features.
1.12.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration
To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox mobile App, KYC process must be completed successfully.
| • | Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address & email ID for KYC registration. for registration purpose. |
| • | Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Adrenox mobile app. |
| • | After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “ADRENOX connect” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store. |
Subscription for the connected car is free for a specified period, depending on the model variant. Post expiry of the free
subscription, the same can be renewed by the user for an extended period.
1.12.2 Login & Registration
Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:
| • | You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page |
| • | Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form for connected services and click on Generate OTP |
| • | OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile number |
| • | If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP" |
| • | After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account” |
| • | On successful verification you will be notified with a message " Account Verified" |
| • | You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I Agree" option on successful authentication |
1.12.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin
This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.
Forgot your password
In case you forget your password:
| • | Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page |
| • | In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP |
| • | Enter the OTP and click on Next button |
| • | Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button |
Change your password
To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:
| • | Tap on the top Left corner from home screen |
| • | Click on My Account and select Change Password |
| • | Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields |
| • | Fill all the required field and tap on save button |
1.12.4 ADRENOX connect Features
|
FEATURE |
DESCRIPTION |
|---|---|
|
Alerts |
|
|
Over Speed Alert |
When your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application |
|
High Engine Temperature Alert |
Alerts when Engine temperature beyond the predefined limit |
|
Tyre Pressure Alert |
Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and navigate to nearby petrol station |
|
Lamp Status Alert |
Alerts when vehicle park lamp left in ON condition while locking the vehicle
Notifies when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps to turn OFF remotely via mobile application |
|
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert |
Notifies when normal vehicle start /stop event is detected |
|
Door Open Alert |
Notifies when any of the doors open while vehicle is moving and also when you trigger for door lock and the door remains open
unintentionally
|
|
Geo-Fence Alert |
Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area
Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of that boundary |
|
Unauthorised vehicle entry Alert |
Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected |
|
Low Fuel Alert |
Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps you to nearby fuel station |
|
Route Deviation Alert |
Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path |
|
Time Fencing Alert |
Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period |
|
Seat Belt Alert |
Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application |
|
Driver Drowsiness Alert |
Alerts the user when the driver is detected to be drowsy while driving |
|
Insurance expiry Alert |
Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches
Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire |
|
PUC expiry Alert |
Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire |
|
Engine Idle Alert |
Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application |
|
Service reminder |
This feature alert’s the user for service due |
|
PKE / RKE low battery alert |
This feature alert’s the user when key battery is low |
|
Low DEF alert |
This feature alert’s the user when DEF level is low |
|
DPF choke alert |
This feature alert’s the user when Diesel Particulate filter is about to choke |
|
Brake pad wear alert |
This feature alert’s the user when Front Brake Pad is worn out |
|
Park brake not applied alert |
This feature alert’s the user when he/she forgets to apply park brake after parking the vehicle |
|
Location Based Service |
|
|
Live tracking |
GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time
Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement
Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends |
|
Save Route / Save Place |
Provision to save a route /place |
|
Find my car |
Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle |
|
Share my car location |
Share your car's location with friends and family |
|
Push to car |
Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle |
|
Sync location on SUV |
Provides updates of any upcoming event by syncing with the calendar |
|
Ecosense |
Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip |
|
Eco Sence Leader Board |
Based on Eco score, The user’s driving pattern will be ranked for Country, state & district wise |
|
Trip History |
Provides detailed information about the trips |
|
Weekly Report |
Provides details about various vehicle parameters for a defined time period |
|
Trip Replay |
Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video |
|
Pit Stops |
Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership and so on |
|
Read Vehicle Status |
|
|
Check door status |
Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door |
|
Check tyre pressure |
Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure |
|
Check lamp status |
Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp |
|
Check ODO |
Allows the customer to check the odometer of the vehicle |
|
My SUV info |
Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on |
|
Check AC Status |
Allows the user to view the current status of the AC |
|
Check Distance to empty |
Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel |
|
Seat Belt Status |
Helps the user to check the Driver/Co-Driver seat belt is buckled or not |
|
Safety |
|
|
E-Call |
In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With You Hamesha & Emergency contacts
along with the current vehicle location.
|
|
SOS Button |
In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With You Hamesha & Emergency contacts
along with the current vehicle location
|
|
Road Side Assistance |
Allows the user to reach out for help in case of vehicle breakdown |
|
Remote Function |
|
|
Remote Skyroof control |
Allows the user to remotely control Skyroof using mobile app |
|
Remote Start/ Stop |
Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app |
|
Remote Climate control |
Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app |
|
Remote Window Up/Down |
Allows the user to remotely control the Driver window (with anti-pinch) using mobile app |
|
Remote Door Lock/Unlock |
Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary |
|
Remote Lamp On/Off |
Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app |
|
Locate my SUV |
Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights |
|
APK Features |
|
|
Horoscope |
Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign. |
|
Just dial |
Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the infotainment |
|
Zomato |
Allows the user to search for various restaurants and cuisines using Zomato app in the infotainment |
|
India Today |
Allows the user to browse through news using India Today app in the infotainment |
|
Weather Update |
Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the infotainment |
|
Travel Explorer |
Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in the infotainment |
|
Others |
|
|
ETA |
Allows the user to know the Estimated Time of Arrival of your vehicle at your current mobile location. |
|
In-Home Alexa |
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands) |
|
Valet Mode |
Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access
the Valet mode will be 1234
|
|
Contact us |
Any Query / Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the
customer on details
|
|
Smart Home Control |
Allows the user to control the smart appliances via vehicle location |
|
Log Book - Fuel(Fuel Diary) |
Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear representation of the fuel filled and the
amount spent
|
|
Greetings |
Greetings to the user on special occasions |
|
Do-Not Disturb |
Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification when mobile is detected in the vehicle |
|
Journey Planner |
Allows the user to plan a journey by providing some basic information |
|
Request app Access |
Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users |
|
My Documents |
Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC etc |
|
Profile Manager |
Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both |
|
To-do list |
Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the specified time |
|
Smart Wearables |
Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (applicable for both Android and iOS) |
|
Pick up Reminder |
Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time |
|
Service Booking |
Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the With You Hamesha app |
|
Personalised Safety Alert |
Alerts the user via a personalised beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the speed limit |
|
Toll Dairy |
This Feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route & toll amount can be recharged via Adrenox App as well.
Feature also provides you alert whenever your toll balances goes low.
|
|
Personalised Greetings |
Personalised welcome message, which will be configurable by the user & he/she will be welcomed with the audio uploaded by
them (Ex: Kids voice, Fav music, Fav hero dialogues)
|
|
Feature Auto Suggestion |
This Feature analysis user last 3 months feature usage pattern & suggest user on the non —utilised feature. |
|
Mahindra – Lens |
This feature is Visual search tool to know your XUV700 tell tail lights better |
|
Ask Mahindra |
This feature helps the customer to connect with Mahindra executive for any queries/support related to vehicle. |
2 SEATS AND SAFETY
2.1 Seats
Sitting in Correct Position
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:
| • | Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back |
| • | The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 5 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head |
| • | Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest |
| • | The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility |
| • | Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel |
| • | Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the clutch pedal |
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal), steering
wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.
Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expectation and cause the
driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle,
an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary.
Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position
adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal
injury.
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
2.1.1 Front Seat
Front Seat Slide
 |
Move the seat forward or backward by lifting the adjustment lever located under the seat front and release once the desired
position is reached.
|
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully and the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked
seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to be sure
it is locked.
Front Seat Recline
 |
To adjust the seat back, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever at the
desired position.
To return the seat back, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
|
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or the shoulder
strap may contact your neck.
The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the
lever.
Front Seat Height Adjustment
 |
The driver seat height can be raised or lowered with the help of height adjust handle.
|
To RAISE the seat height, operate the seat height adjust handle in the upward direction. Repeat this till the desired height
is achieved.
To LOWER the seat height, push down the seat height adjust handle while seated in the driver seat. Repeat this operation until
the desired seat height is reached
Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.
Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment (if equipped)
 |
The driver seat back features lumbar adjustment. The lumbar contour of the lumbar support can be adjusted by means of the
adjusting wheel on the outer side of the seat cushion.
|
Properly adjusted lumbar support provides adequate back support essential during long journeys.
Do not use force, rotate the lumbar adjustment knob beyond the extreme stop positions in either direction.
Driver and Co-Driver Ventilated Seats (if equipped)
Seat Ventilation is a special feature with an additional air circulation of the driver and Co-driver seats.
It ventilates the seat temperature for comfortable driving.
The active ventilation fans blows air to the occupant contact area with seat inserts through small vent holes on the surface
of the seat cushions and seat backs.
You can use the seat ventilation whenever you feel excessive heat or sweating in contact surfaces between occupant and seat.
| • | The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together with the air conditioner |
| • | The ventilated seat is not a cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it |
| • | Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation. Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you to be frightened or injured |
| • | If there is any problem with the seat ventilation system, Contact Mahindra Authorised service center for further assistance. |
| • | Do not place any sharp or heavy object on the passenger seat as this could damage the ventilation system by cracking the seat upholstery. |
| • | If any liquid spills, clean it up right away. Wait until the seat is dry before using the air ventilation feature. The performance of the seat ventilation system may be impacted by liquid contact. |
| • | Do not use the ventilated seat in the following situations:
|
| • | Never use a solvent to clean the seats, including petrol, paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or alcohol-based products. |
| • | The battery can be discharged if the seat ventilation system is used for a long time with the ignition mode ON and without engine running |
| • | In above condition, the ventilated seat will operate for a short period of time and will be turned off for better functionality of ventilation fan |
| • | If small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks are clogged with dust and dirt, the air flow from the ventilated seat may weaken. In this case, clean the seat surface by the vacuum cleaner |
Seat Ventilation Control:
The Seat Ventilation Setting accessible through Infotainment HVAC application or from footer selection of the infotainment
Launcher Screen.
Once the application has been launched, the footer selection will result in NO ACTION.
| • | Go to setting page in infotainment Screen then select climate control. |
| • | Enable the Driver and Co-driver seat ventilation feature based on the requirement. |
Once enable the seat ventilation, user will be able to modify the airflow with three different level. The default level will
be OFF.
For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like Level 3 →Level
2 → Level 1 → OFF →Level 1 → Level 2 →Level 3→ Level 2 →Level 3 → OFF
The long press on the Seat Ventilation Icon, to turn it OFF.
Again, a short press on the same icon will enable the feature with Last stored Level.
Power Seat with Memory (Driver Side only) (if equipped): The power seat switches are provided on the driver door panel.
 |
The Power seat provides advanced 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat.
|
It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms. The shape
of the switches guide you to the function it has been assigned. During vehicle running, Power seat movement is not allowed
for short duration considering user safety. If you need further seat movement, release and press the switch once again.
Memory Functions
The driver seat is equipped with a memory function, which allows you to save and recall seat and rearview mirror settings
for up to three different drivers. The memory function is operated by a button located on the driver’s side door.
|
Seat Adjustment |
ORVM Adjustment |
 |
 |
This system makes sure you have enough room to get in and out of the driver's seat by sliding the driver's seat back.
Driver Seat and ORVM Memory Setting (If equipped)
1. Turn Ignition ON
2. Adjust the Seat to your desired position
3. Adjust the ORVM to your desired position
4. Short Press the M button followed by desired memory button assigning (1, 2 or 3)
5. Stored your preferred Seating and ORVM position to memory, and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from cluster
If ORVM adjustment is skipped and memory switches are pressed ORVM position at that instance of time will be saved. The ORVM
can be positioned by the user and stored in the same switch.
| • | The driver seat always move to its most rearward point of travel regardless of the current position |
| • | The final seat position will not be always the same when using easy access function. There will be some differences within the acceptable range depending on the occupant's weight and vehicle power supply status. This is completely normal and not a fault |
| • | Make sure that the parking brake is applied before adjusting the seat position or operating easy access function so that the vehicle cannot move |
| • | Do not operate seat memory switch or other switch while the easy access function is activated as it can cause malfunctioning of the easy access function |
| • | If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while setting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the memory setting will be cancelled. |
| • | If you do not press any memory switch within 5 seconds,. after pressing the driver seat position memory switch, the memory setting will be cancelled |
Restoring Seat and ORVM Position
 |
In Ignition ON condition, user needs to press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat and ORVM to previously
stored memory location and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from cluster.
|
In Ignition OFF condition, user needs to short pressing/press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat
to previously stored memory location. During memory restore operation, pressing any seat switch shall stop ongoing seat movement.
During memory restore operation, pressing any Seat/ORVM switch shall stop ongoing Seat/ORVM movement.
The ORVM cannot be independently recalled while the seat is in its stored position.
The ORVM can be recalled only when the ignition is ON.
Easy Entry and Easy Exit
The Driver seat is equipped with easy entry and exit function. This helps user to enter and exit the vehicle by moving the
seat backwards and downwards automatically in Ignition OFF and driver door open conditions. This can be enabled or disabled
through the infotainment
In Easy Entry and Easy Exit function, when the door is closed, seat will go back to the same position as it was before opening
the door.
Activation and deactivation:
Go to Vehicle Setting in Infotainment system, Enter Access tab, Enable or disable Easy Entry and Easy exit feature by taping
sliding bar.
| • | Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary, otherwise there is a risk of accident. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake/ clutch pedal can be pressed fully. |
| • | Be cautious when adjusting the seat, you may suffer injuries without paying proper attention while adjusting seat. |
| • | Driver side electric seat can be adjusted in ignition off also, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle, as there is a risk of injury! |
| • | Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery discharge, we suggest that you adjust your seats when the engine is running |
| • | Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat comes in contact with any other object and cannot be adjusted anymore. |
| • | If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be checked and fixed before driving |
| • | Easy Entry/Exit function once enabled, remains active until it is disabled. Be cautious during this operation as the rear seat passenger could get injured. |
| • | Do not put any luggage/water bottles below driver seat as they can obstruct power seat movement or damage seat mechanism/motor |
| • | Do not remove vehicle battery while seat is in motion |
Ergo Lever (Only Co-Driver Seat) (If equipped)
 |
The Co-Driver Seat is equipped with an Ergo lever. This lever enables you to move the unoccupied Co-Driver seat forward, in
order to increase the leg room behind the Co-Driver seat.
|
In order to do this, while seated on the Driver seat/2nd Row seat, operate the Ergo lever located on the backrest of the Codriver
seat and push the seat forward manually.
Do not operate the Ergo lever when someone is occupying the Co-Driver seat. Doing so may cause injury to the Co-Driver since
their leg can go and hit the instrument panel.
2.1.2 Second Row Seats
The second row seat has a 60:40 split configuration/Captain seat and a foldable armrest.
|
60:40 Seat |
Captain Seat |
 |
 |
Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous. The luggage can become a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in a sudden
stop or collision. Luggage should always be kept on the floor.
To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.
Second Row Seat Recline (if equipped)
 |
To change the second row seat back angle, lean forward slightly while raising the recline lever on the side of the seat cushion,
lean back to the desired position and release the recline lever.
|
Make sure the recline lever returns to its original position and the seat back is locked in place by rocking the seat back
forward/ backward.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the
lever.
Second Row Seat Folding (Third Row Seat Entry/Exit Access)
The second row 40P/Captain seat can be tumbled forward to provide access to the Third Row Seat.
Entry Access
|
|
|
|
60/40 Seat (Exit Access)
|
|
 |
 |
|
Captain Seat (Exit Access)
|
|
 |
 |
| • | To tumble the Second Row 40P/Captain seat while sitting on the Third Row seat, pull the lever behind the 40P/Captain backrest. |
| • | In order to use the 2nd Row Seat to load cargo, first tumble the seat as explained above. Then, push the seat downward of the vehicle (>45 kg) until the two latches underneath the seat lock onto the floor. |
|
|
 |
| • | To tumble the seat from the back folded (cargo) condition, first make the seat back upright. Then operate the one-touch fold and tumble lever. |
The seat tumble mechanism cannot be operated when the seat is in the folded position.
Return the seat back to its upright position in one continuous motion to securely lock the seat and in turn avoiding seat
flipping forward suddenly leading to injuries
If this happens, release the seat lock by pulling the lever and repeat the procedure.
Be cautious when placing your hands around the seat anchors. You could pinch your hands or fingers between the seat anchor
and the seat. Hold the edge of the seat when lowering it into place. Never place your hands between the seat anchor and the seat
To avoid Personal injury keep legs away from the seat anchor when relatching the seat back to the fold position.
Second Row Seat Folding (For Luggage)
 |
 |
 |
The 2nd Row 60P seat back can be folded to load cargo on top of it. Operate the lever on the side of the 60P seat. This lever
actuates the backrest fold mechanism. Release the lever once the backrest has folded completely.
|
To bring the seat back to upright position and push the seat back until it locks into the desired reclining position.
Second Row Armrest (If equipped)
 |
 |
The Second Row 60P seat features armrest with cup holder.
| • | To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown). |
| • | When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest. |
Second Row Captain Seat arm rest fold and unfold (If equipped)
While folding the seat back ensure arm rest is in unfold condition.
Second Row Bench Seat (If equipped)
The second row seat can be folded forward to increase luggage space.
| • | Pull the strap rearwards to unlock the seat back as shown in below image |
| • | Then push the backrest forwards to fold it. |
| • | To open the seat back, simply pull the backrest rearwards until it gets locked in position. |
 |
|
 |
 |
2.1.3 Third Row Seats (If equipped)
 |
Access to or exit from third row seat is possible by completely folding the second row seat. Second row seat features 60:40
split configuration. The Second row 40P seat can be tumbled to gain access to third row seat.
|
Refer to the previous sections for details regarding folding of second row seats.
Third Row Seat Folding
To fold the third row seat, unlock the seat back by pulling the lever on the rear of the seat back outwards. Then push the
seat back forward to fold the seat.
Similarly, lower the other half of third row seat to get a completely flat surface. Both the second row and third row seats
can be folded flat to maximise the luggage space.
|
To Fold |
To Open |
 |
 |
To open the seat back, pull on the lever to unlock the backrest and use the same lever to lift the backrest upward till it
locks at the rear most position. When loading bigger pieces of luggage behind the third row seat, the backrest can be locked
at a more upright position using the same lever. There are 6 locking positions at 2 degree interval each. This provides seating
space for the 3rd row occupant as well as provides a slightly increased volume for storing luggage.
2.2 Head Restraint
The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top
of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head
restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.
 |
Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To raise the head restraint,
pull the restraint up.
|
To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out completely
by depressing the locking button while pulling the restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat
top and push the restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest
is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.
Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted, head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With
no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.
Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row outboard & 3rd row occupants only.
2.3 Seat Belt
2.3.1 General Warnings and Instructions
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along
the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.
| • | All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger. |
| • | In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt |
| • | In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident. |
| • | Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.
|
| • | The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained. |
| • | For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems |
| • | Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision. |
| • | Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash |
| • | An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system after an accident |
| • | Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle |
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious
injury.
| • | Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage |
| • | Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts |
| • | Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer |
Prevention of seat belt Slow retraction:
1. Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of safety belt.
2. Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as Webbing , D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.
3. Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.
4. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper.
Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the seat belt assembly.
5. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction becomes
very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be followed:
1. Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The Battery
terminal to be removed before disassembly of pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered in Airbag ECU and
Airbag ECU will show malfunction.
2. Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap Pretensioner/
Anchor wire assembly (if equipped). Kindly follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure in case of pretensioner
safety belts. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do not use any chemicals and
cleaning fluids could damage the Seat belt webbing and other parts.
3. If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation. Then please contact the dealer for help in cleaning.
4. In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 liter of lukewarm
water.
5. Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with Pretensioner .
6. Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using lint free
cloth.
7. After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free dry cloth.
8. After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing .
9. Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re-assemble all trim parts.
10. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.
Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before
travel.
Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.
 |
The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder,
but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident
or emergency stop.
|
A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus
and/or the pregnant mother.
Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting
in serious personal injury.
Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The
seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.
Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries.
Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:
| • | Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident. |
| • | Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident |
| • | Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle |
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts.
The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout across the
child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, the child should
be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child
could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration
 |
 |
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used
by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
|
Seat Belt Types with respect to Location |
|
|
Seat Location |
Seat Belt Type |
|
Driver Seat
|
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor Pretensioner
|
|
Co-Driver Seat
|
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
|
|
2nd Row LH (40P)
|
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
|
|
2nd Row RH (60P)
|
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
|
|
2nd Row Captain Seat LH / RH
|
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
|
|
3rd Row LH / RH
|
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
|
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet
locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.
Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat
belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.
Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains
the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as
not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.
2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner
In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s
and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined
with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.
 |
This vehicle is provided with a anchor pretensioner for driver seat (in the sill board area) and is used to help to protect
occupant in the sever crash events .
|
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.
To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping
it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.
In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position
with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag. Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again.
Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorised dealer.
 |
Operation of pretensioner
When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants
to their seats.
|
 |
Operation of load limiter
After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.
|
Fastening the seat belt
Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can
protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not
wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
| • | Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle |
| • | Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract |
| • | Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time |
| • | Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury |
| • | Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service centre |
| • | An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint |
2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt
 |
 |
Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle.
Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in
the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates
and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for
further details.
2.3.5 Seat Belt Release
 |
 |
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly,
pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to
the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.
2.3.6 Driver and Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Indication (If equipped)
The driver, co-driver and front facing rear passenger seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in instrument cluster if driver, co-driver and front facing rear passenger doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled.
Chime will be activated when vehicle travels more than 25 Kmph of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95
seconds for front seat belt and 35 seconds for front facing rear seat belt.
2.3.7 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication (If equipped)
 |
 |
PODS detects the presence of occupant in the front passenger and front facing rear seating locations.
If Occupant is present on front passenger and front facing rear passenger seats and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder
warning symbol lamp will glow on the center fascia switch provided in vehicle instrument panel and will be continuous until
the seat belt is buckled.
It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning
symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds for front seat belt reminder and 35 seconds for front facing rear seat
belt reminder.
Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the detection senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non
authorized seat covers.
Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.
Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed
to harness person taller than 140cm Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat.We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX
 |
 |
 |
2.3.8 Seat Belt Height Adjuster
 |
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of
the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.
|
The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest
to the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing
the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure
that it has locked into the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.
2.4 Child Restraint System (CRS)
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods
1. ISOFIX Marking gjkkllool 2. Latch anchor/ISOFIX rod
 |
|
| • | Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual. |
| • | Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint |
ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt
to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier
and quicker installation.
| • | When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint. |
| • | Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle |
How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor
 |
There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back side of the rear row front facing seats.
|
| 1. | Remove the headrest from the rear row seat |
| 2. | Place the child restraint on the rear row seat |
| 3. | Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual |
| • | The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death. |
| • | If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation |
| • | Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat. |
| • | Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury. |
| • | Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints |
| • | The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back. |
| • | Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may cause risk. |
| • | Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint. |
| • | Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of front seat which may cause problem to front occupants. |
|
Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) Using The Seat Belt
|
|||
 |
 |
 |
 |
|
Mass group |
Restraint Device Figure |
Seating position |
Mounting method of vehicle |
||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Passenger Seat |
Second Row |
Third Row |
|||||||
|
Activated front Passenger Airbag |
Deactivated front Passenger Airbag |
Left |
Centre |
Right |
Left |
Right |
|||
|
Group 0 Up to 10 kg |
Rear Facing Child Seat |
X |
U |
U |
X |
U |
X |
X |
3 - Point Seat Belt |
|
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg |
Rear Facing Child Seat |
X |
U |
U |
X |
U |
X |
X |
3 - Point Seat Belt |
|
Group I 9 to 18 kg |
Forward Facing Child Seat |
U |
X |
U |
X |
U |
X |
X |
3 - Point Seat Belt |
|
Group II 15 to 25 kg |
Booster Seat |
U |
X |
U |
X |
U |
X |
X |
3 - Point Seat Belt |
|
Group III
22 to 36 kg |
Booster Seat |
U |
X |
U |
X |
U |
X |
X |
3 - Point Seat Belt |
|
Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) Using ISOFIX & Top Tether
|
|||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mass group |
Restraint Device Figure |
Seating position |
Mounting method of vehicle |
|||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
First Row |
Second Row |
Third Row |
||||||
|
Left |
Left |
Centre |
Right |
Left |
Right |
|||
|
Group 0 Up to 10 kg |
Rear Facing Child Seat |
X |
IU |
X |
IU |
X |
X |
ISOFIX & Top Tether |
|
Group 0+
Up to 13 kg |
Rear Facing Child Seat |
X |
IU |
X |
IU |
X |
X |
ISOFIX & Top Tether |
|
Group I 9 to 18 kg |
Forward Facing Child Seat |
X |
IU/IUF |
X |
IU/IUF |
X |
X |
ISOFIX & Top Tether |
|
Group II 15 to 25 kg |
Booster Seat |
X |
IUF |
X |
IUF |
X |
X |
ISOFIX & Top Tether |
|
Group III
22 to 36 kg |
Booster Seat |
X |
IUF |
X |
IUF |
X |
X |
ISOFIX & Top Tether |
|
Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
|
|||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
|
|||
|
Mass group |
Size Class |
Fixture |
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Rear outboard |
|||
|
Carry cot (Newborn Baby) |
F |
ISO/L1 |
X |
|
G |
ISO/L2 |
X |
|
|
Group 0: up to 10 kg (~9 months) |
E |
ISO/R1 |
IU |
|
Group 0+: up to 13 kg (~0 – 2 years) |
E |
ISO/R1 |
IU |
|
D |
ISO/R2 |
IU |
|
|
C |
ISO/R3 |
IU |
|
|
Group I 09 to 18 kg (~9 months – 4 years) |
D |
ISO/R2 |
IU |
|
C |
ISO/R3 |
IU |
|
|
B |
ISO/F2 |
IUF |
|
|
B1 |
ISO/F2X |
IUF |
|
|
A |
ISO/F3 |
X |
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
U: Suitable for “Universal” category restraint approved for use in this mass group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “Universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’
or ‘semi-universal’ categories
IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg
X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
|
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
|
|
|
Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation
instructions provided in manual carefully before use.
|
|
|
Anchorage Location : Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure.
|
|
 |
 |
Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured
| • | Never transport them unless they are properly restrained |
| • | Use restrained system which meet safety standard |
| • | Follow directions provided by the manufacturer |
Warning for Child Restraint
| • | Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child. |
| • | Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system. |
| • | Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby. |
| • | Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions. |
| • | Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below: |
|
1 |
GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 KG |
4 |
GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 KG |
|
2 |
GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 KG |
5 |
GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 KG |
|
3 |
GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 KG |
| • | Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is recommended). |
| • | Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended). |
| • | Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat. |
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage
| • | The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death. |
| • | If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation. |
| • | Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications. |
| • | The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location. |
| • | Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions. |
| • | Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury. |
2.5 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further
protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal
impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's
or front passenger's head/chest.
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the
seat belts.
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the
risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.
Airbags
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
 |
A: Knee airbag for the driver (if equipped)
B: Front Passenger Airbag
C: Driver Airbag
D:Two side (seat) impact airbags (if equipped)
E: Two curtain airbags (if equipped)
|
2.5.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front
passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “SRS AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag
pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less
than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Driver Airbag
 |
 |
Front Passenger Airbag
 |
 |
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not
deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.
Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.
2.5.2 Knee Airbag (If equipped)
The driver’s knee airbag is located on the dashboard under the steering wheel
 |
 |
If the driver’s posture is improper while driving, the knee air bag might not protect the driver’s knee area when the airbag
deployed.
2.5.3 Side Impact Airbag (If equipped)
 |
Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's
driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.
|
 |
 |
The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always
wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do
not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a
deploying airbag.
| • | In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs |
| • | The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants |
| • | For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps |
| • | Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system |
| • | Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag |
| • | Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself |
| • | Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates |
Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation
An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags
independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
2.5.4 Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped)
The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.
The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain
airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed
to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
 |
 |
| • | In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs |
| • | In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat |
| • | When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position |
| • | Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag |
2.5.5 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation
The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is available in instrument cluster menu.
Select Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation option in SETTINGS menu to activate/deactivate (not inflatable) the front
passenger airbag as per below reference images
 |
 |
 |
 |
If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will appear.
Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF” position.
Passenger Airbag ON Indicator
This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable
the passenger airbag.
2.5.6 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance or service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition
is ON, and it turns OFF after about two seconds as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction
lamp.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately
contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
| • | The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) seconds after switching the ignition ON |
| • | The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly |
| • | The lamp comes ON intermittently |
Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, changes to
the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering
wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications
to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer..
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function
as intended. Take the vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for a thorough inspection
of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may
not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.
2.5.7 Airbag Inflation/Deployment
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration
beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.
Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags.
Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly
worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.
Deployment of the airbags happen in a milliseconds, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with
a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some
minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to
prevent any potential skin irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the accident.
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
| • | Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury |
| • | Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once |
| • | Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats with any object (e.g. dash panel covers, seat covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly |
| • | The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle |
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of
the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
 |
 |
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.
 |
|
| • | The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard |
| • | Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury |
| • | Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor |
| • | All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts |
| • | All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts |
| • | Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly positioned in the front seats |
| • | Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual |
| • | Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags |
| • | Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses |
2.5.8 Child Restraint and Airbag
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it
In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor
 |
 |
 |
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants
and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.
Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with
the help of ISOFIX.
Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.
2.5.9 Airbag Deployment
The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.
Front Airbag
Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
2.5.10 Airbag Non-deployment
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:
| Collision with Utility Poles or Trees : | |
 |
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is
concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
|
|
Frontal Impact :
|
|
 |
Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.
|
Frontal Side Swipe Impact:
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.
 |
In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to
provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.
|
Under-ride Situations :
Running under a truck's tailgate may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.
 |
Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly
low.
|
Rear-end Collisions :
 |
Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by
the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
|
Potholes or Stepped Surfaces :
 |
Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.
|
Rollover:
 |
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. However,
side impact and curtain airbags may inflate only when severe side impact causes rollover.
|
2.5.11 Airbag Service
Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries,
or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for inspection and repairs.
Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual
or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy
when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer if these parts must be removed.
Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer to do these jobs.
Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should
be towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.
Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents
or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
3.1 Instrument Cluster Overview
|
Type 1
 |
|
Type 2
 |
3.1.1 Speedometer
| High | Low |
 |
 |
The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in kilometers per hour.
The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the
factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and distance travelled.
Over Speed Alert Buzzer
Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minutes when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level chime is triggered,
it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph.
Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed
is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph.
3.1.2 Tachometer
| High | Low |
 |
 |
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 1000 RPM. Operating the
engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed below 2500 RPM
and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the
engine which is not covered by warranty.
Tacho red band range:
Gasoline 5500 - 7000 rpm
Diesel 5000 - 7000 rpm
Diesel (High Variant): Tacho red band shall change based on engine parameters
3.1.3 Fuel Level Gauge
| High | Low |
 |
 |
The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank.
F indicates the tank is full (60 +/- 2 liters), E indicates the tank is empty.
When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 liters).
when the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount
of fuel required to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small amount of reserve fuel always
remains in the tank.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier
than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking
even after filling sufficient fuel, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest.
It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished
to get correct fuel level.
IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for DTE fluctuation.
3.1.4 Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine
coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage
the engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge.
If not, stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if
required. If the engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
| High | Low |
 |
 |
Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin/eyes
causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the reservoir.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.
3.1.5 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)
 |
This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature and we can change units based on infotainment setting.
|
3.1.6 Gear Information
Gear information shows the actual gear the vehicle is currently in.
Based on the various parameters, it will also provide an up shift / down shift recommendation for better fuel economy.
| Type 1 | Type 2 | Operating Conditions |
|---|---|---|
 |
 |
UP/DOWN arrows recommend to up shift / down shift the drive gear. |
3.2 Drive Mode (If equipped)
 |
Drive modes shall change driving characteristics by changing elements such as Engine power, Traction control, Climate control
and Steering weight settings.
|
The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Zip, Zap, Zoom and Custom which have their own distinct pre-set configurations.
The selection of drive mode is made via dedicated button or switches.
Drive selection menu part of infotainment and cluster will display the current drive mode.
Refer Drive modes in the “Starting and Driving chapter” for further details
3.3 Instrument Cluster Control Switches
The instrument cluster menus can be changed using the cluster control switches on the Steering wheel or the Driver side switch
bank.
Driver side switch bank is located on the right hand side of the Instrument Panel.
A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction
C: OK button: Select a option
D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
The right most steering wheel switches are used to control the instrument cluster menus.
 |
 |
A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction
C: OK button: Select a option
D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
E: Favorite button: Select a Favorite option
3.5 Drive Info
 |
Drive info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering Wheel/Driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Drive info page.
|
3.5.1 Trip Meter
 |
 |
Two trip meters are available with max range of 9999.9 km. These are available in drive info menu and can be accessed using
UP/DOWN switch.
Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will reset average speed and drive time associated with the particular
trip.
It is recommended to reset the trip meters when battery is disconnected and reconnected
3.5.2 Drive Time
 |
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
Drive time is part of trip page. Drive time will reset along with trip reset.
|
3.5.3 Average Speed
 |
Average Speed is calculated based on the total distance covered and time taken from the start of this trip cycle. Average
speed info is part of trip page. Average speed will reset along with trip reset.
|
3.5.4 Clock & Date
|
The time on the clock & date is in sync with the infotainment. Any change in infotainment will reflect on the cluster. Refer settings for changing clock type.
|
|
 |
 |
3.5.5 Driver Drowsiness Index (If equipped)
Drowsiness detection is a safety technology that can prevent accidents that are caused by drivers who fell asleep while driving.
 |
Cluster will display the 5 level of driver attention level based on drive Pattern
5 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Completely Awake.
|
 |
4 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Quite Awake.
|
 |
3 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is Neither Awake nor Sleepy.
|
 |
2 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is slightly sleepy and can stay awake with effort.
|
 |
1 Attention Bars - Indicates that the driver is extremely Sleepy and cant stay awake
|
Refer DDD section in “Starting and Driving the vehicle” chapter for more details
3.6 Fuel Info
Fuel info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
 |
It displays data related to fuel consumption pattern of vehicle.
Use OK button to enter Fuel info page.
|
3.6.1 Distance to Empty (DTE)
 |
Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available fuel.
|
3.6.2 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
AFE is calculated based on the last AFE reset cycle.
 |
AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Additional options to change AFE reset to every ignition ON or after every fuel refill are present in the settings menu.
|
3.6.3 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)
 |
Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current driving pattern. Higher value on display means vehicle is consuming
less fuel, lower value on display implies it is consuming more fuel.
|
3.7 Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped)
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically. It provides an immersive experience by having option to
switch off the lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
 |
 |
Digital speedometer can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Digital Speed page.
3.8 Vehicle Info
Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
 |
It displays data related to vehicle information like TPMS , Roll & Pitch and AWD Torque distribution.
Use OK button to enter Vehicle info page.
|
3.8.1 Tyre Pressure (if equipped)
Tyre Pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres.
This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure warning
limit for any reason. Including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. The Tiretronics will continue
to alert the driver and will not turn off untill the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.
 |
 |
Refer Tiretronics chapter for more details.
3.9 Navigation (If equipped)
 |
Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank. It displays data related to
map view which is displayed in infotainment. Use OK button to enter Navigation page.
|
Cluster will display the Navigation information Like Turn By Turn Navigation and Full / Partial Map view from Android auto
(If available) or native navigation.
|
Partial Screen Navigation |
Turn by Turn Navigation |
 |
 |
To enter Full navigation if you are at partial Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view full map.
Full Screen Navigation
To enter partial navigation if you are at Full Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view partial map.
3.10 Driver Assistance (ADAS) (If equipped)
 |
Driver Assistance can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.
Use OK button to enter Drive page
|
|
Driver Assistance Menu View |
Non Driver Assistance Menu View |
 |
 |
Long press up button shall enter into LKAS setting (if equipped)
Refer “Advanced Driver Assistance System” chapter for more details.
Cluster will display the below features in Driver Assistance Menu:
1. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 3. Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
2. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
3.11 Audio Info (If equipped)
 |
Audio can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Audio page
|
|
This below pages will display current media source which is playing your music like AM / FM, USB & Bluetooth.
|
|
 |
 |
3.12 Display Layout
Cluster selected Themes:
 |
Display Layout can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Display Layout page
Display layout provides immersive experience by having different skin option based on user choice.
|
Normal Skin - Default Skin
Information Skin: Cluster shall display all the information with different visual layout.
Minimal Skin: Cluster shall display minimal information which is required for less informative.
Display Layout shortcut : Long press menu button shall enter into display layout directly
3.13 Cluster Setting (if equipped)
 |
Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch
|
To enter inside settings, press ok.
Use UP / DOWN button to navigate setting features
Following settings are available:
1. Driver Assistance (if applicable) 2. AFE Auto Reset
3. Passenger Airbag 4. Blind View Monitoring(if applicable)
5. Drowsiness Detection(if applicable)
6. TPMS – Auto Learn (if applicable)
7. Tyre Fill Assist (if applicable) 8. Sound
9. Clock Type 10. Factory Reset
3.13.1 Driver Assistance (If equipped)
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Driver Assistance option.
|
 |
3. Press OK to enter Driver Assistance option. Use Up/Down button to navigate driver assistance features and press OK button
to select the corresponding feature options.
|
 |
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the options and press OK button to select the corresponding option.
|
Above procedure is applicable for all other Driver Assistance features.
Refer to Advanced Driver Assistance System chapter for more details.
3.13.2 AFE Reset
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to AFE Auto Reset option
|
 |
3. Press OK to enter AFE Auto Reset option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
|
After Ignition : After a predetermined time where the vehicle’s ignition is OFF the AFE will reset.
After Refuelling : Refuelling at ignition OFF and then driving will reset the AFE.
3.13.3 Passenger Airbag
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Passenger Airbag option
|
 |
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select, a pop-up
will appear to confirm the selection
|
 |
4. Press OK to select a option. Confirm your selection by selecting Ok or Cancel.
|
3.13.4 Blind View Monitoring (if equipped)
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Blind View Monitoring Option
|
 |
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Blind View Monitoring Option.
|
3.13.5 Drowsiness Detection(if equipped)
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Drowsiness Detection Option
|
 |
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Drowsiness Detection Option.
|
3.13.6 TPMS-Auto Learn (if equipped)
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to TPMS-Auto Learn Option
|
 |
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the TPMS-Auto Learn Option.
|
3.13.7 Tyre Fill Assist (if equipped)
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Tyre Fill Assist Option
|
 |
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Tyre Fill Assist Option.
|
3.13.8 Sound
Turn Indicators, Notifications Sound and Lane Departure Warning (If applicable) are having options to select different sounds
and Volume level adjustment.
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Sound Option.
|
 |
3. Press ok to enter Sound Option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to enter Sound Options
|
 |
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
|
 |
5. Use Up/Down button to Select the volume Level. Press OK to enter Volume Option.
|
 |
6. Up/Down button to select the volume levels. Press OK to select. Once selected it will return to previous page.
|
3.13.9 Clock Type
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Clock Type Option.
|
 |
3. Press ok to enter Clock Type option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
|
3.13.10 Factory Reset
|
|
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
|
 |
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Factory Reset Option.
|
 |
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Down button to select Confirm. Press OK to start factory reset process.
|
| 1. | To go to the main settings screen from any settings menu, use Up/Down buttons to go to the top of the menu screen and press the OK button. |
| 2. | In the settings screen, if no option is selected for a long time. The screen will go to the previous displayed screen. |
3.14 Alert History
 |
Alert History can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Alert History page
|
 |
Alert history allows to check any active applicable vehicle warnings in the instrument cluster display.
|
Live warnings shall displayed in the cluster center display area and warning count will decrease if viewed in the warning
history page.
3.15 General Alerts
| Display | Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
This alert is displayed when any doors are open and show the door identified as open. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the check engine warning telltale is ON and engine is running. |
| Display | Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
This alert is displayed when engine temperature high telltale is ON and engine is running. |
 |
This alert is displayed when an ABS related malfunction is detected. 50 |
 |
This alert is displayed when low brake fluid is detected and engine is running. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the park lamp is ON and the ignition is turned OFF. |
 |
This alert is displayed when low fuel warning telltale is ON or blinking and engine is running. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the engine oil pressure warning telltale is ON and engine is running. |
 |
This alert is displayed when either of driver or passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled. |
 |
This alert is displayed when water is detected in fuel filter and engine is running. It is applicable for the diesel variant
only.
|
 |
This alert is displayed when passenger airbag is turned OFF. |
 |
This alert is displayed when brake EBD related malfunction is detected. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the ESP malfunction is detected and engine is running. |
 |
This alert is displayed when EPS related malfunction is detected |
 |
This alert is displayed when Skyroof is left open at ignition off. |
 |
The alert is displayed when ignition is off, driver door is open and the driver has forgotten their phone in the wireless
charging tray.
|
 |
This alert is displayed when AWD system related malfunction is detected. |
 |
This alert is displayed when Zip drive mode is activated. |
 |
This alert is displayed when Zap drive mode is activated. |
 |
This alert is displayed when Zoom drive mode is activated. |
 |
This alert is displayed when Custom drive mode is activated. |
 |
Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if any malfunction is detected it will display the “Contact
Dealer” alert.
Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert is displayed in cluster. |
 |
The alert is displayed when the driver becomes very drowsy and is not able to stay awake. The alert indicates the driver to
take an immediate break.
|
 |
This alert is displayed when malfunction in Attention Assist system is detected. |
 |
This alert is displayed when any front brake pad is detected as worn out and needs to be replaced. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the Hill Descent Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the Hill Hold Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system. |
 |
This alert is displayed when the vehicle is driven above 120 kmph. |
 |
This alert is displayed when you try to move the vehicle and the park brake is still engaged. |
 |
This alert is displayed 200 Kms before the scheduled service limit. |
 |
This alert is displayed when a coin or metallic object is placed on the wireless charging tray & the phone is kept on the
object leading to poor charging of phone. This will also be displayed if the phone is detected in a incorrect position on
the charging tray. Adjust the phone to allow it to charge optimally.
|
 |
This alert is displayed when a NFC enabled card is placed on the wireless charging tray & a phone is placed on top of. Kindly
remove the card to protect the card.
|
 |
This alert is displayed when the Skyroof is open and vehicle speed in high. |
 |
Rain Sensor/Non Rain Sensor Variant: This alert will displayed when low wipe is ON for more than 10 seconds or high wipe is ON for more than 5 seconds in both
RLS & Non RLS variants.
|
3.16 Partial Alerts
|
Display |
Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
This message comes when auto light is turned OFF. |
 |
This message comes when auto light is turned ON. |
 |
This message comes when auto wiper is turned OFF. |
 |
This message comes when auto wiper is turned ON. |
 |
This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON. |
 |
This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF. |
 |
This message comes when brake pedal is pressed when in cruise mode or if trying to activate cruise control when vehicle speed
is below the cruise threshold.
|
 |
This message comes when cruise mode is ON and accelerator pedal is pressed to overtake. |
 |
This message comes on when HDC function is enabled by pressing the HDC switch and the conditions for HDC are met . The brakes
will then maintain the vehicle speed while descending the Hill
|
 |
This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is disabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch. |
 |
This message comes on when the Hill Descent Control is enabled manually by pressing the HDC Switch and is ready to control,
but the conditions for HDC are not met yet.
|
3.17 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle.
It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works
only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch
is not engaged
|
<Level 5> |
|
 |
 |
|
<Level 3> |
|
 |
 |
|
<Level 0>
|
|
 |
|
Operating Conditions
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is
turned to "ON" position from "OFF" position
Working conditions:
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.
3.18 Cluster Features
Blind View Monitor (If equipped)
|
Left Side |
Right Side |
 |
 |
Blind view monitoring system displays the video from the camera placed in the side mirrors when turn indicators are ON.
Favorite Function
Favorite button short press, Cluster will display the screen which was already saved as favorite
User can set as favorite any one of the menu screen (Vehicle info, Fuel info, Digital speed, Drive info, Navigation, Driver
Assistance, Audio, Display Layout & Setting Level 1) except settings (Level 2,3,4) REGEN function & Warning history.
|
Favorite Feature
|
Non–Favorite Feature
|
 |
 |
Each time user make a screen as favorite by pressing Favorite button long press during the previously added favorite screen
will be replaced by the current screen.
3.19 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
 |
 |
Few Tell Tales grouped in to same slot and this will be cyclic based on tell tale status.
|
Sr. No. |
Symbol |
Warning Lamp/Telltale |
Lamp Pre-check |
Lamp Status while Engine running |
Action/Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
1 |
 |
Left Turn Indicator |
No |
Slow or Fast Blinking |
Indicates left turn lamp is blinking Slow Blinking: Normal operation Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced |
|
2 |
 |
Right Turn Indicator |
No |
Slow or Fast Blinking |
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking Slow Blinking: Normal operation Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced |
|
3 |
 |
Cruise Control telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode |
|
4 |
 |
Automatic Emergency Braking System Malfunction* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
|
|
5 |
 |
Water-in-Fuel Warning telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance |
|
6 |
 |
Immobiliser lamp |
No |
Continuously ON / Blinking |
SLOW BLINKING: Vehicle is armed with the remote FAST BLINKING/CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a system malfunction Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
7 |
 |
ABS Warning telltale |
Yes |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
8 |
 |
Park Brake / EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale / EPB* / Brake pad worn out* |
Yes |
Continuously ON |
Either one of the below conditions: 1. Park Brake might be engaged 2. Brake fluid level might be low 3. There is a malfunction in brake EBD. 4. Front Brake Pad wear worn out. Please contact Mahindra Dealer immediately. |
|
9 |
 |
Parking Lamp telltale |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Park Lamp is ON |
|
10 |
 |
Airbag Warning telltale |
Yes |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
11 |
 |
HHC Malfunction* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
12 |
 |
Door Ajar Warning telltale |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates any doors, boot or hood are open |
|
13 |
 |
Low Fuel Warning telltale |
No |
Continuously ON/Blinking |
Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. Refuel immediately |
|
14 |
 |
ESP OFF telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates ESP has been switched OFF |
|
15 |
 |
ESP Malfunction Warning telltale* |
Yes |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
BLINKING: Indicates ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
16 |
 |
Front Fog Lamp telltale* |
No |
Continuously Lamp ON |
Indicates front fog lamp is ON |
|
17 |
 |
Tiretronics telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for further details |
|
18 |
|
Seat Belt Warning telltale |
No |
Continuously ON |
If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance |
|
19 |
 |
SCR/DEF malfunction telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions
mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM” |
|
20 |
 |
DPF telltale* |
No |
ON/Blink |
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions
mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM” |
|
21 |
 |
Glow Plug telltale* |
No. |
Continuously ON |
Indicates glow plugs are active. |
|
22 |
 |
Head Lamp High Beam |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON |
|
23 |
 |
OBD telltale |
Yes |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts, if is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to emission
system, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
24 |
 |
EPS Warning telltale* |
Yes |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
25 |
 |
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning telltale |
No |
Continuously ON |
Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is low. Check
oil level and top-up or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance |
|
26 |
 |
Check Engine telltale |
Yes |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Indicates a potential malfunction in the EMS, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
27 |
 |
Battery Charging System Warning telltale |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction in charging system. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance |
|
28 |
 |
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning telltale |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Engine temperature very high. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
29 |
 |
REGEN telltale* |
NO |
ON/Blink |
ON: Regeneration is required Blink: Regeneration is in progress |
|
30 |
 |
AT Warning telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON or Blink |
Telltale is used to indicate an AT fault. Telltale Continuous ON means AT Fault. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
if the MIL Lamp doesn’t turn off after an ignition reset.
Blinking Telltale implies overheating of clutch due to abuse conditions. This is only to warn the customer and to prevent
clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the clutch temperature has becomes normal. |
|
31 |
 |
HDC Malfunction telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
32 |
 |
Rear Fog lamp telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Rear fog lamp is ON |
|
33 |
 |
Engine Start/Stop telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
CONTINUOUSLY ON: Engine is in auto stop mode Blinking: Stop/Start is about to stop the engine FAST BLINKING: Stop/Start is inhibited due to unhealthy battery conditions |
|
34 |
 |
Automatic Emergency Braking System OFF telltale* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates AEB system is turned off by user. |
|
35 |
 |
Lane Keep Assist System*(LKA) |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates LKA system is in Standby state |
 |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Indicates LKA system is in Active state Blinking: LKA system providing Warning to the user |
||
 |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
LKAS System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LKAS system.Contact a Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly |
||
|
36 |
 |
Lane Departure Warning System*(LDW) |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates LDW system is in Standby state |
 |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Indicates LDW system is in Active state Blinking: LDW system providing Warning to the user |
||
 |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
LDW System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LDWS system. Contact a Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly |
||
|
37 |
 |
Smart Pilot Assist* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Standby state |
 |
No |
Continuously ON or Blinking |
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Active state |
||
 |
No |
Continuously ON |
Smart Pilot Assist system fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with SPA system. Contact
a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
||
|
38 |
 |
Adaptive Cruise Control* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in standby state. |
 |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in active state. |
||
 |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition. Check if radar is
blocked and clean. |
||
 |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. |
||
|
39 |
 |
Auto High Beam Boost* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Auto headlamp booster is in active state when the vehicle speed crosses 80kmph with high beam ON |
|
40 |
 |
High Beam Assist* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates high beam assist function is enabled/active. |
|
41 |
 |
Auto Vehicle Hold* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in standby Mode. |
 |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in Active Mode. |
||
 |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of Auto Vehicle Hold. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
||
|
42 |
 |
AWD Malfunction* |
No |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of AWD. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
43 |
 |
EPB Malfunction* |
Yes |
Continuously ON |
Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
|
* if equipped / select models or variants only |
|||||
3.20 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
3.20.1 Turn Lamps
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase
in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as soon as possible.
3.20.2 Cruise Indicator (if equipped)
The lamp indicates the status of the cruise mode. Lamp ON indicates the vehicle is in cruise mode by pressing the SET+ button
on the steering wheel switch bank.
Blinking indicates that the accelerator pedal is pressed when in cruise mode allowing for an overtake.
When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel switch bank is pressed, cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating
that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode,
there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer.
3.20.3 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The water-in-fuel warning lamp illuminates when the accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible
limit. The fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel system
component damage, which will not be covered by the warranty.
3.20.4 Immobiliser
Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the vehicle security system
is armed (when locked using the RKE).
Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobiliser system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp
If the ABS malfunction lamp is ON when driving ABS will not operate. But the brake system will still operate conventionally.
In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as
soon as possible.
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS.
Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
if ABS malfunction lamp and parking brake warning lamp are simultaneously ON, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Contact
a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
In this case, the ABS function is not available, but the conventional brake system is properly working
3.20.6 Parking Brake Lamp
The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the
lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps.
| • | Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it |
| • | Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level |
| • | Check if front brake pad is worn out. If yes, replace the front brake pads |
Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into
the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake
fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.
If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder
to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for checks or repairs.
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in
serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention
to the driving conditions while this warning light.
3.20.7 Electric Parking Brake Malfunction (EPB) (If equipped)
The EPB Lamp illuminates, when there is a malfunction in EBP. The lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON and
then goes off after about 4 seconds.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service
Centre
If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector
lever to the P position
3.20.8 Park Lamp
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through Combination switch. When ignition is switched
OFF and if park lamp is ON with driver door open, and alert will be audible.
3.20.9 Airbag Warning Lamp
If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
| • | Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started |
| • | Lamp does not illuminate at all |
| • | Illuminates while driving |
Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag may
not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which
may result in personal injury.
3.20.10 HHC malfunction (if equipped)
HHC Malfunction Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. if there is any
malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.
There are chances of vehicle rolling down when starting on a hill. No assistance will be available from ESP system.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service
Centre
3.20.11 Door Ajar Warning Lamp
The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the hood and back door are open during ignition ON.
The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed properly.
3.20.12 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently
and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
3.20.13 ESC OFF Lamp (if equipped)
The ESC OFF lamp illuminates when the ESC has been switched OFF manually.
This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds. Pressing and holding the
ESC OFF switch (for more than 3 seconds) turns on the indicator lamp indicating that the ESC function is deactivated.
3.20.14 ESC System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability. If
the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service
Centre
3.20.15 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)
The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched ON only when the
parking lamp is ON.
Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.
3.20.16 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (If equipped)
The Engine Stop/Start lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Stop/ Start System. The lamp
illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the
vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.
3.20.17 Tiretronics (if equipped)
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION : Tiretronics lamp Blink for approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON.
SYSTEM WARNINGS: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION: System fail to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.
SYSTEM WARNING: indicated Low/High Tyre pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.
3.20.18 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the driver to fasten the seat belt when the ignition
is ON and vehicle running condition. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver fastens the seat belt properly.
3.20.19 DPF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions
mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
3.20.20 DEF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing
is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.
3.20.21 Glow Plug Indicator (If equipped)
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically goes OFF when
the glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer, if it illuminates while driving.
3.20.22 Head Lamp High Beam
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash
is used.
3.20.23 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)
The Auto Head Lamp booster telltale will come on when vehicle speed crosses 80 kmph with High beam ON
The booster telltale will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed comes below 75 kmph
3.20.24 OBD Check Lamp
The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the engine is started indicating normal
status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
There may be a malfunction in:
| • | The fuel management system |
| • | The emission control system |
| • | Systems which affect emissions |
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.25 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in steering effort.
3.20.26 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when the engine is started.
If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil level
after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately.
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle
control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered
by the limited warranty.
3.20.27 Check Engine Lamp
Indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system.
Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for necessary repairs.
3.20.28 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not being charged or when there is a malfunction
in the alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues
to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction
in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary
electrical equipment and recheck. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.29 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is above 113ºC . It starts to flash
when the temperature reaches 113ºC and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 115ºC.
The bars in the temperature gauge also flash in the same frequency as the high temperature warning lamp when the above set
temperature thresholds are reached.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered
by the limited warranty.
3.20.30 Regen Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
if it is continuously ON, It indicates the DPF Manual Regeneration is required. It will blink when Manual regeneration is
in progress. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.
3.20.31 AT Warning Lamp (If equipped)
| • | This warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned on and it goes off when the engine is started. |
| • | If the lamp stays ON or comes ON while driving, some of the Transmission control components including sensors and devices may be malfunctioning. |
| • | If the Indicator lamp is blinking continuously, reduce the vehicle speed until the lamp stops blinking. Contact the Mahindra dealer as soon as possible. |
3.20.32 HDC Malfunction (if equipped)
The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 seconds. Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction
warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service
Centre
3.20.33 LDW System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
If there is a problem with the LDW system, a message (Lane Departure Warning unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If
the problem continues the LDWS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate . We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer for further assistance.
|
|
Illuminates
|
LDW system is in Standby mode
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
LDW system is in Active state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
LDW system is in Not Working/Fail state
|
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following::
| • | Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.) |
| • | Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens. |
| • | If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance. |
LDW System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, means this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately.
3.20.34 LKA System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
If there is a problem with the LKAS system, a message (Lane Keep Assist unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the
problem continues the LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminates. We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer for further assistance.
|
|
Illuminates
|
LKA system is in Standby state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
LKA system is in Active state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
LKA system is in Not Working/Fail state
|
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following:
| • | Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.) |
| • | Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens. |
| • | If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance. |
LKA System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately.
3.20.35 Automatic Emergency Braking ON/OFF Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when user turned OFF the AEB system. The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF
status on the LCD display. If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, we recommend you to have the system
checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance
3.20.36 Automatic Emergency Braking Warning/Malfunction Lamp (if equipped)
This warning lamp Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system.
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt /snow or if there is permanent failure.
| • | Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth. |
| • | Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens. |
| • | If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance. |
3.20.37 High Beam Assist Lamp (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates when the driver sets HBA ON/OFF via cluster and Auto Light Switch to ON and Head Lamp Switch
to High.
| • | Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.) |
| • | Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens. |
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.38 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition.
|
|
Illuminates
|
ACC system is in Standby state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
ACC system is in Active state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
ACC system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
ACC system is Not Working/Fail State
|
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow.
| • | Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth. |
| • | Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens. |
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Indicates permanent failure of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.39 Smart Pilot Assist Warning Lamp (If equipped)
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display when SPA system is in fail/Malfunction
|
|
Illuminates
|
SPA system is in Standby state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
SPA system is in Active state
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
SPA system is in Not Working/Fail state
|
The warning light illuminates When the radar sensor/Camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow or if there is permanent
failure.
| • | Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth. |
| • | Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens. |
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.20.40 All Wheel Drive Malfunction (AWD) (If equipped)
The warning light illuminates on the display when AWD system is in Malfunction
3.20.41 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) (If equipped)
The AVH Lamp illuminates, there is a malfunction in AVH.
|
|
Illuminates
|
There is a malfunction in AVH
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
AVH is in Standby mode
|
|
|
Illuminates
|
AVH is in Active mode
|
| • | When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, the AUTO HOLD system will be switched to READY mode and the "AUTO HOLD" indicator on the instrument cluster will be illuminated in white. |
| • | Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again turns off the indicator and deactivates the AUTO HOLD system. |
If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised
Mahindra Service Centre
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control system which are as follows.
| 1. | Crankcase emission control system |
| 2. | Evaporative emission control system |
| 3. | Exhaust emission control system |
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and
maintained by an authorised Mahindra dealer.
Emission Control Systems for Petrol vehicles
It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust emissions from an engine. It is crucial for meeting emission standards
specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter (TWC) for meeting BS VI emission norms.
For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a
Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in owner’s manual should be followed.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides
(NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N) and water (H2O).
Emission Control System for Diesel vehicles
The emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for
meeting emission norms specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
| 1. | Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) |
| 2. | Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR) |
| 3. | Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) |
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained
by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in the Warranty & Service Information Guide need to be followed.
It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel, Confirming to IS 1460:2017 BS VI Specification.
4.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after-treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons
(HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).
4.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active emission control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing
agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is called as Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water which is then expelled through
the vehicle tailpipe.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN
To enable the SCR system to work efficiently and to ensure emission compliance, it is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting
IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
Replenishing DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern
and it may be necessary to refill the DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled service if need be, You are advised to monitor
DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text messages displayed on the Cluster.
MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Authorised Mahindra Dealers in packs of variable capacities. Individual DEF Packs may
have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, take care to avoid spillage on your body or
outer panels of the vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use
DEF which does not meet the above specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.
| • | Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always. |
| • | Incase of non-availability of the above mentioned MaxiCLEAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used. |
| • | Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged. |
| • | Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. |
| • | DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored as per recommendations. Hence ensure to store DEF in a cool, dry place. |
| • | Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the after treatment system. |
| • | While refilling DEF be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system. |
| • | While refilling DEF, use only the pipe supplied with the MaxiCLEAN. Do not use any funnel or container. Any contamination with Diesel or oils will cause malfunction of the after treatment system. |
| • | If DEF accidently spill over vehicle components or metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components, metal surfaces and painted body panels. |
| • | DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged. |
| • | In such a case, do not start the engine and immediately contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance. |
Contamination/ Incorrect DEF: If incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an authorized M&M dealer to determine the appropriate
repair procedure.
Handling of DEF
| • | Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing |
| • | Keep DEF out of the reach of children |
| • | In case if any part of the body comes in contact with DEF, clean affected area immediately with plenty of water |
| • | If DEF comes in contact with eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately and seek medical help. |
| • | If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical help. |
| • | Refrain from storing DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from the container which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause irritation to the eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough. |
| • | When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Therefore ensure to refill DEF in a well- ventilated area only. |
| • | If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which cannot be removed. |
DEF Operating Condition: DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). This is a natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the vehicle is designed considering this
and does not require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within 20 minutes
of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in vehicle or property damage.
Refilling DEF: Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located beside the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under the body.
Following below are the steps to refill the DEF:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.
 |
2. Press the key fob unlock button and Press the fuel lid gently once to open.
|
3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and remove.
4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has a unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same
to avoid spillage. Example. 10 Liter Pack provided with filler tube.
5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity is 20 liters. Minimum quantity to be filled is 6.0 liters.
6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the components/surfaces in case the DEF spills over.
7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the clock wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.
8. Switch the ignition ON
9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If the DEF Level Low warning is still appearing, check if enough
quantity is filled, If still problem persist contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during regular service at dealership and the required quantity will be filled
accordingly.
It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off condition only
4.2.1 SCR Alerts
Introduction
DEF telltale will turn ON and an error message with code will be displayed on the cluster screen due to any of the following
reasons:
| • | DEF level low |
| • | Incorrect DEF detected |
| • | DEF dosing malfunction |
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use
DEF which does not meet the specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.
4.2.2 DEF Level Indication
When DEF level in the tank falls below pre-defined values, warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:
Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, a minimum of 6.0 liters of DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings
continue even after refill, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
|
E31 |
E32 |
E33 |
 |
 |
 |
|
E34 |
E35 |
|
 |
 |
In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not recommended.
Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.
Only a Authorised Mahindra Dealer will be able to correctly determine the quantity of DEF present inside the tank. Hence if
you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill only 6.0 liters in case the DEF Low level warning is flashed.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill the DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause engine start restriction.
4.2.3 DEF Quality
If SCR system detects the quality of DEF inside the tank is not meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will
be flashed in stages as explained below:
|
E11 |
E12 |
E13 |
 |
 |
 |
|
E14 |
E15 |
|
 |
 |
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality, visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer to have this repaired.
Failure to repair the system may cause the engine start restriction.
4.2.4 DEF Dosing Malfunction
If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in components or tampering, warnings are flashed in stages as explained
below:
|
E21 |
E22 |
E23 |
|---|---|---|
 |
 |
 |
|
E24 |
E25 |
|
 |
 |
If the DEF telltale turns on due to dosing malfunction, visit an Authorised Mahindra Dealer to have this repaired. Failure
to repair the system may cause engine start restriction.
4.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes
the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF is a regenerative filter. Regeneration
is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the accumulated particles/soot from the DPF.
The process is called as DPF Active Regeneration.
However, if the vehicle continues to be driven in the below conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed
because of low exhaust gas temperatures.
1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in the city
2. Frequent short trips
3. Low speed for a long time
When more than a certain amount of soot gets deposited, the DPF telltale turns ON along with the DPF clogged alert.
 |
 |
If the DPF telltale turns ON when driving the vehicle, it indicates that the DPF regeneration has not occurred successfully.
At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration must be done as mentioned below:
Take the vehicle to an empty stretch of road/highway and drive for 20 – 30 mins @ speeds above 60 km/hr until the telltale
turns off.
| • | Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving. |
If the DPF telltale starts blinking, perform DPF park regeneration following the below procedure.
If the OBD telltale is ON & DPF telltale blinking. Stop the vehicle and contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer for
assistance.
Continuous driving with DPF telltale blinking may lead to failure of exhaust system components
DPF Park Regeneration
DPF park regeneration is the procedure to start a DPF regeneration when the vehicle is stationary from the instrument cluster.
Follow the below steps to perform Park Regeneration. The DPF park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale is
ON in the instrument cluster.
| • | Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material. |
| • | Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply the parking brake. |
| • | Access the Drive info menu in the instrument cluster and press the down button to go to the REGEN screen, REGEN screen will
appear only when the REGEN telltale is ON. |
| • | REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF. |
| • | When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long Press OK button on the steering wheel or the driver side switch bank to start park regeneration. |
| • | Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear below REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase indicating regeneration
has started. |
| • | Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Once completed the REGEN telltale in the instrument cluster will turn OFF. The engines idling speed also returns to normal. |
| • | To abort the Park regeneration in case of any emergency, turn OFF the ignition or press any of the Accelerator, Brake or Clutch Pedals. |
| • | If the Park Regeneration gets aborted by itself or does not start, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance. |
| • | During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle close to any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe. |
| • | To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system. |
Park Regeneration process will not start if CHECK ENGINE LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take your vehicle to a Authorised
Mahindra dealer for assistance.
When Park regeneration is happening do not press the Accelerator, Brake, Clutch pedals or change the gear from Neutral or
Park as this will abort the regeneration process.
Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460: 2017 spec only.
If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause damage to
the DPF system and will not be covered under warranty.
4.4 Instrument Cluster Telltales for DPF & SCR Systems
Do's & Don’ts
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
| • | Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used. |
| • | Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after-treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged. |
| • | Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the treatment system. |
| • | Total DEF quantity inside the DEF tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. |
| • | While refilling DEF inside tank be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system. |
| • | DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged |
| • | If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body panels |
| • | Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state |
| • | When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Refill DEF in a well - ventilated area only. |
| • | Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing |
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle near any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission
gases from exhaust pipe.
To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from exhaust system.
Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while driving.
5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE
XUV700 comes with RKE or PKE depending on the variant.
 |
Your key tag number is given on the tag attached to the key. It is recommended that you record the key tag number and store
in a safe place. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of the doors and ignition with steering lock.
|
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine,
operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the by stander and/or children
seated inside.
5.1 Doors
5.1.1 Flush Outer Door Handle
XUV700 comes with the flush outer door handle. It comes with two types:
i). Manually operated ii). Electrically operated
i). Manually operated
 |
|
 |
|
 |
|
 |
|
 |
|
ii). Electrically operated
unlock the center locking with RKE /PKE key fob unlock button (Refer center locking chapter for details)
|
|
|
|
|
|
| • | Door handle will return to its original position when the vehicle is locked by RKE / PKE key fob or the vehicle speed exceeds 7 kmph |
5.1.2 To Open a Door from Inside
 |
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.
|
5.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.
 |
A: Lock
B: Unlock
|
|
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock
or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
|
|
Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer
to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.4 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical Handle)
|
|
Push the handle slightly as shown in the image.
|
|
|
Pull the handle firmly outwards and grip & pull the handle further to gain access for the key.
|
 |
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bidirectional; you can
insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.
|
Conventional locking is on driver door side only, No key lock set on codriver door.
For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the
handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.
For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes
to release mode) insert the key and rotate the key anti-clockwise gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to nominal
position. Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.
A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside. Locking the driver door from outside
activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further
details.
5.1.5 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Electrical Handle)
 |
Push the handle slightly as shown in the image.
|
|
|
Push handle as shown in the Picture and grip & pull the handle further to gain access for the key.
|
|
|
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bidirectional; you can
insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.
|
Conventional locking is on driver door side only, No key lock set on codriver door.
For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the
handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.
For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes
to release mode) insert the key and rotate is anti-clockwise gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to nominal position.
Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.
A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.
Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer
to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.6 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate
 |
Press the Tailgate release button for 1 second on the remote to unlock the tail door. The hazard lamp flash three times indicating
the same.
|
 |
Then press the tail gate release switch on the bottom of the tailgate within 45 second as shown in the illustration and pull
tailgate to open.
|
To close the tailgate, lower the tailgate half way down and allow it fall on its own weight. The door will be locked automatically.
5.1.7 Tailgate Safety Release Lever
 |
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate inside. In
an emergency condition the passenger can open the tailgate from inside the vehicle.
|
The tailgate can be opened by the following steps:
| 1. | Insert the mechanical key into the hole. |
| 2. | Slide the mechanical key to the left side and hold the key in the same position to open the tail gate. |
5.2 Central Locking System
All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.
5.2.1 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Outside
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively
in the driver door keyhole.
If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when central locking activated. It will only get locked when the door is
completely closed..
Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter
for more details.
5.2.2 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Inside
|
|
Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock tab up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.
|
Anti-Lock Out
Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door) — If any door is opened and driver door is in closed condition:
| • | Vehicle speed is below 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock & unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked. |
| • | Vehicle speed above 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first time itself. |
If driver door is open and master actuator lock is performed, vehicle will not get locked
5.2.3 Child Safety Rear Door lock (If equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear
door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.
 |
A: Activate/Lock
B:De-activate/Unlock
|
If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear
seat.
5.3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
 |
A: LED
B: Lock
C: Tailgate Release / Search
D: Unlock
|
5.3.1 Precautions while Handling Remote Key
| • | Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF signal |
| • | Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight |
| • | Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer |
5.3.2 Remote Key Status LED
LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the Remote lock/unlock/trunk button input.
5.3.3 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE
 |
Press the LOCK button on the RKE key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.
|
Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using RKE.
Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.
If alarm is in mute condition only the Hazard lamps will flash. If alarm to be activated then Press Lock & Unlock button together
to unmute the alarm. Now both Hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.
5.3.4 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE
 |
Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE key fob to unlock and disarm the vehicle.
|
Hazard lamps flash twice - if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If equipped)- if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm - if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times to
indicate the same.
5.3.5 Auto Locking
All doors will get locked automatically when;
| • | All doors are closed properly |
| • | Vehicle speed is greater than 7 kmph |
Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed,
the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 7 kmph
Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed,
the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 7 kmph
5.3.6 Auto Unlocking
Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions:
| • | When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR In the event of a crash |
5.3.7 Auto Re-locking
Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
| • | No door status change for 45 seconds after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE |
5.3.8 Search Function
|
|
Press the Tailgate button on the key fob 2 times within 2 seconds to locate the vehicle in a parking lot. Search alarm can
also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.
|
When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode:
| • | Pressing any button on the key fob again switches OFF the alarm |
| • | Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors |
The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.
5.3.9 Mute/ Unmute Function
 |
The chirps can be muted / unmute. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE / UNMUTE mode.
Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate unmute to mute condition.
|
Hazard lamp & chirp will flash once to indicate Mute to un-mute.
In the unmuted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps). In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
In the unmuted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps). In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
In the unmuted condition,
| • | Alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp) |
| • | RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) |
| • | RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps) |
In the mute condition,
| • | Only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible. |
5.3.10 Theft Alarm
Vehicle enters alarm mode when there is a change in door status/ignition status provided the vehicle was locked through RKE.
Hazard Lamp and Alarm will flash 27 seconds.
After the alarm period, there will not be any alarm again till any further change in the door/ignition status.
The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual
key will also activate the security system.
When the vehicle is armed by RKE, opening the door from the inside by operating the door inner handle or opening the door
from the outside using the key will be treated as unauthorised activating the vehicle security alarm. If this occurs, the
alarm can be disarmed by either pressing the ‘UNLOCK’ button on the RKE or turning ON the ignition followed by a successful
authentication.
5.3.11 RKE Operating Range
 |
Using RKE key fob , you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approximately 9 m (30 ft) This is in open
area.
|
If there is reduction in RKE range, please follow the steps below:
. Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather
. Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE
. Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section
. If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
. Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE
. Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section
. If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
5.4 Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System (if equipped)
Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the
doors. You can start/stop, lock or unlock the vehicle using PKE. To do this, you only need carry the PKE key fob with you.
|
|
A: LED
B: Lock
C: Tailgate Release / Search
D: Unlock
|
The front side of the PKE key fob has three control buttons: Unlock (D), Lock (B) and Tail gate release (C) buttons. There
is also a emergency key release button, which releases a mechanical key for emergency purposes (E.g. when PKE battery is low).
To remove the metal key, press and hold the release button and pull the mechanical key out.
| • | While locking and unlocking the vehicle Passively, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3ft (1m). |
| • | Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves |
| • | Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight |
| • | Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer |
| • | The PKE can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity |
Carrying the PKE along with you, you can lock or unlock the doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without
inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a PKE is similar to the remote keyless entry.
Locking the vehicle – Through Flush Handle(Electrical Handle)
1. Carry the PKE
2. Close all the doors
 |
3. Push the handle to lock the vehicle
|
4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the locking (5 blinks and 5 chirps will be provided if engine bonnet
is open while locking)
| • | Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle |
| • | Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the door handle with the PKE key fob in the proximity (PKE key fob should be nearer to the triggered side). For E.g., locking/unlocking of the driver door is possible only if PKE is around the driver area |
| • | Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the doors do not lock, a chime is heard along with the hazard blinking
for 5 times, then one of the following situations are possible reason:
|
| • | On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle, an alert will displayed in cluster, if the steering is not locked |
| • | With the one PKE Key fob inside, on locking the vehicle using other key fob/2nd key fob, the key which is kept inside would get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. To make the key active again, the vehicle should be unlocked either using PKE or by pressing remote unlock using the other key fob with which previously the vehicle was locked. |
| • | On performing PKE passive lock with key fob in your possession in ignition ON state, "Key Not in Vehicle" alert will be triggered in cluster along with chirp & hazard lamps flash for 5 times and vehicle will remain in unlock state. |
| • | On performing key fob remote lock with all doors closed in ignition ON state, no alert will be triggered and vehicle will remain in unlock state. |
Unlocking the vehicle:
| 1. | Carry the PKE Key fob |
| 2. | Press the button in the door handle |
| 3. | All doors would unlock and Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice. |
| • | Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside driver door handle |
| • | Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the door handle only when the key is in same side of the driver door handle is pressed |
Unlocking the Tail door alone:
1. Carry the PKE Key Fob
|
|
2. Press the trunk release button in the tail door and pull the tail door
|
3. Tail door would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink 3 times
4. On closing the door, tail door would get locked automatically
| • | Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle |
| • | Tail door can be unlocked by pressing the button in the tail door only when the key is in range from the tail door |
5.4.1 Engine START/STOP Switch (SSS) (if equipped)
 |
The engine can be started or stopped by pressing the Start Stop Switch (SSS), with the valid PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle.
|
Whenever the doors are opened or the door handle button is pressed, the engine start/stop button will be illuminated and will
go off after few seconds.
 |
Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop switch (SSS), an alert would be provided in the instrument cluster
for few seconds. Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately to rectify the problem.
|
Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the failure.
Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.
Engine start/stop Switch positions:
To operate the engine start /stop switch to its intended function, PKE Key Fob should be inside the vehicle.
OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop button once. Status LED in the engine start /stop
button goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.
If the Engine is not switching off after pressing the Engine Start Stop switch (One Press), then press and Hold start/stop
switch for more than 3 seconds ( Long press SSS) or rapidly press & release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3
seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition(IGN) status is changed to ACC position. Vehicle ACC mode will get off after 30
second OR user is opening Driver door. However, you can still lock the vehicle using mechanical key. Contact the nearest
Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop
button is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened
or 30 seconds after engine start stop Switch changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you
open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking
the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle
to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF/ACC without depressing the
clutch pedal and with the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop button will turn red to indicate
the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.
|
OFF |
ACC |
ON |
|
|
 |
 |
Keeping the system in the ignition ON position for longer time (will be noticeable by the LED lamp of the SSS remaining ON)
without engine running, can drain the battery. Switch OFF the system if engine is not to be started for long duration.
Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following conditions:
| • | If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked |
| • | A warning would be displayed in the cluster screen for few seconds.
Still if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.
|
| • | When engine start/stop button is ON or engine is in running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened
& closed, the system checks for the PKE Key fob.
|
Bring the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle or keep the key in the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle
Manual Transmission: To start the engine, press the clutch and press the engine start/stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine
can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Automatic Transmission: To start the engine, Gear Lever shall be in Park Position, press the Brake pedal and press the engine start/stop button once
with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Ensure the gear lever is in neutral/Park position before starting.
If engine start/stop switch is pressed without pressing the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) pedal, engine will not start, and the
vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON
If the engine start/stop switch is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) in depressed
position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and is not a fault.
Never press the engine start/stop switch while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine
turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking
function, leading to an accident.
Even if the key fob is not there in the cabin. The engine will keep running, until it is switched off, after that it can not
be restarted in absence of the key Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop switch is in OFF position and always take the PKE Key
Fob with you. If the Ignition remains ON and the doors are locked. The central locking system will give 3 chirps and flashes
to indicate. This can cause battery to be drained off.
As a emergency procedure (if any failure of brake or clutch switch). If the SSS is pressed continuously for more than 10 seconds
then the engine can be started.
Emergency stop: To turn the engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 2 seconds or rapidly press
and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition is changed to ACC position.
BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected on pressing SSS and SSS LED will be blinking in red color. In
such a situation, press the start/stop button once while the status LED in the button is blinking Red and the below error
message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
 |
Now place the key fob in the key fob tray with the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal pressed and then push the Start-Stop switch
twice to Start the engine.
|
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED
will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster. In this case, if you press the
Start/Stop switch again vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.
Back-up Mode : When the key fob battery is critically low to detect the key fob inside the vehicle or the battery is dead or not available.
This mode is triggered by the PKE to understand the condition to Switch ON ignition and to start the vehicle engine.
 |
If key fob battery is detected low by the PKE system, an alert would be triggered. Change the battery by following the procedure
as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.
|
Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the
vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.
5.4.2 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation
If the PKE Key Fob does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:
Refer to Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical/Electrical Handle) section for more details.
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person.
A maximum of 2 Keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.
The PKE Key Fob may not work if any of the following occurs:
| • | If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the PKE/RKE |
| • | The PKE Key Fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the PKE/RKE could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smartphone . Avoid placing the PKE/RKE and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices |
| • | Another vehicle PKE key fob is being operated close to your vehicle |
| • | PKE Key Fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the PKE Key Fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected |
| • | Keep the PKE key fob away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty |
Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition
in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.
Do not hand over the PKE Key Fob to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised
in doing so.
5.4.3 PKE Alerts
| Display | Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
The warning will be triggered when the vehicle Ignition is in ON condition with the Brake pedal pressed & the user is pressing
SSS to start Vehicle & Gear position is not in park or neutral. (If equipped)
|
| Display | Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
The warning will be triggered when vehicle Ignition ON or Engine running condition, user is pressing SSS to turn OFF Vehicle
& Gear position is not in park. (If equipped)
|
|
|
The warning will be triggered when Start Stop switch is Malfunction . Kindly contact the nearest Mahindra dealer |
|
|
The warning will be triggered when Key fob is not getting detected by the system. Users need to keep the key in the armrest
Key fob Tray and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when vehicle ignition in OFF condition. When user tries to lock the vehicle using driver door
PKE trigger switch, but key is inside the vehicle.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle. |
|
|
The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low. |
 |
This is information to user In Ignition on to start Car by pressing Brake pedal along with SSS Press AT variant. |
 |
This is information to user In Ignition on to start Car by pressing Clutch pedal along with SSS press MT variant. |
5.4.4 Steering Lock Alerts
|
Display |
Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop
button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.
|
 |
If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting locked even though all locking conditions are satisfy then this warning is displayed. |
 |
A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel lock unit has system failure. in this case please
contact Mahindra dealership to check system failure.
|
 |
A warning will be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel does not pair with PKE ECU. in this case please
contact Mahindra dealership to check system.
|
5.5 Remote Battery
Battery Specification
|
Battery Voltage |
3 V |
|
Battery Capacity |
225 mAh |
|
Battery Model No. |
2032 |
Remote Battery Replacement
If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is
weak.
 |
The rear side of the Remote is snap fitted. Flip open the key blade and use two fingers on the side of the fob and gently
pry open the battery cover.
|
Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry out the battery to and discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery
No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the
Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive
side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
The Batteries are Lithium Ion batteries. They should be kept away from children.
This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere
two hours and lead to death.
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and
keep away from children. If you think that batteries have been swallowed or stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help
immediately.
5.6 Key Fob Tray
 |
 |
The Key fob is to be kept in the above shown key fob tray when the system requests, like in the case of the below error message
in the instrument cluster.
|
|
This message is displayed only when the PKE system fails to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is
trying to Switch ON the ignition.
|
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED
will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster.
In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before the above error message in the instrument cluster goes away
the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.
5.7 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost
If you have lost the programmed PKE/RKE Key fob , contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for procuring a new Smart Key.
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe
required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the Mahindra Authorised
Dealer to understand the formalities involved.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.
If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen
key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using the misplaced key.
Only PKE/RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.
5.8 Key Fob Limitations
When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external
source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc.. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle Key Fob. This interference
may be resulting in RF signal not being received by RKE/PKE system controller.
Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference Zone, Key Fob may start
working properly.
If still key fob not working then contact Mahindra Authorised service center for assistance.
5.9 Engine Immobiliser System
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorised person.
The Engine immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from the correct coded key. When
a wrong key is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the hazard lamps flash along with a siren.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from the ignition.
5.9.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:
| • | Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key |
| • | The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be started. |
| • | The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE. |
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system
malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
With the correct coded key in the vehicle and pressing the SSS ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the system.
It enables the engine to start.
In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt
to start the vehicle again.
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect proper
operation of the system and will void your warranty.
The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual
key will also activate the security system.
Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE/RKE key fob, in this condition
if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorised by the system setting
and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/RKE key fob to off the alarm.
5.10 Opening and Closing the Bonnet
The bonnet release lever is in the driver side foot well area, below the instrument panel. To open bonnet follow the steps
below:
 |
1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument panel to release the bonnet.
|
 |
2. Lift the bonnet a little to access the safety latch holding the bonnet striker. This safety latch is located below the
bonnet at the center.
|
 |
3. Lift the safety latch and lift the bonnet.
4. bonnet is supported by a stay rod.
|
Be careful while opening the bonnet immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot
Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the bonnet
can open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a loss of visibility, resulting in an accident
Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is obstructed
To close the bonnet, follow the below steps:
| 1. | Remove the stay rod supporting the bonnet by slightly lifting the bonnet |
| 2. | Bring the bonnet near to its self-opening/closing position |
| 3. | Now, push the bonnet to close and ensure the primary latch is engaged |
| 4. | Before driving off, check bonnet is locked properly with primary latch fully engaged |
Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle is in unlock condition:
| • | Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the bonnet is open |
| • | Hazard cluster telltale also flashes |
To stop the warning, do any one of the following:
| • | Close the bonnet |
| • | Press the hazard button TWICE |
| • | Change the turn signal stalk position |
| • | Drive the vehicle > 10 km/hr. |
5.11 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
Follow the below steps to open the Fuel lid:
|
|
1. Press the UNLOCK button on RKE/PKE.
|
 |
2. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.
|
|
Diesel |
Petrol |
 |
 |
|
Diesel should be filled in diesel filler cap.
|
Petrol should be filled in petrol filler cap.
|
|
Diesel should not be filled in blue (DEF) filler cap.
|
|
3. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction
till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
Fuel filler lid cannot be released whenever the vehicle locked condition.
5.12 Manual Fuel Lid Override
|
Follow the below process to open the fuel lid manually in case of any issue in electrical circuits:
1. Press and Open the trim cover on Left side of luggage compartment.
|
|
 |
2. Unhook and Pull the blue color knob as shown in the illustration to unlock the fuel lid manually.
|
3. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.
4. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction
till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with body.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
Do not pull the cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.
6 STARTING AND DRIVING I
6.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle
Before starting the vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle; for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign
objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Before starting your journey, check and ensure proper functioning of safety devices/components like brake system, steering
system, all lamps & tyres. Also ensure no critical warning lamps are ON in the cluster. In case of any safety device/component
not functioning as intended or any critical warning lamps found ON in cluster, contact Authorised Mahindra service center
and get it rectified before starting the journey.
Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering
adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver's seat
Engine idle speed is controlled by engine management system. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed RPM reduces once the engine warms up.
Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door
open or start the engine in an open area.
Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.
Exterior Lamps: With the help of someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the
driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.
Fluid Leaks: Check the area under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil,
or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
6.2 Starting the Engine
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts. For more information
on seat, headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer “Seat Belts” section.
Before cranking the engine
| • | Make sure the gear shift lever is in Neutral/Park mode |
| • | Ensure that the parking brake / EPB is engaged. Turn the key to IGN position but do not turn the key to start |
Automatic Transmission-AT
| 1. | Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key |
| 2. | Shift the gear shift lever to Park or Neutral position, if found in any other position |
| 3. | Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied |
| 4. | Do not press the accelerator |
| 5. | Depress the brake pedal and press the start stop button or Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine |
| 6. | Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key. |
Manual Transmission-MT
| 1. | Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or through ignition key |
| 2. | Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. if found in any other position |
| 3. | Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied |
| 4. | Do not press the accelerator. |
| 5. | Depress the clutch pedal and press the start stop button or Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine |
| 6. | Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button or key |
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.
If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start even after repeated
attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 seconds before attempting to restart the engine.
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting
a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual for correct procedure.
If the engine still fails to start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
Ensure the following when the engine is running:
| • | All warning lamps are OFF |
| • | Low oil pressure lamp is OFF |
Engine Idling: The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
After idling for a few seconds, follow the below steps to drive away:
Manual Transmission-MT
| 1. | Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking Brake) |
| 2. | Depress the clutch |
| 3. | Shift the gear lever to 1st gear |
| 4. | Release the brake pedal |
| 5. | Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously |
Automatic Transmission-AT
| 1. | Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking Brake) |
| 2. | Depress the Brake pedal |
| 3. | Shift the gear lever to D or R or M |
| 4. | Drive by releasing the brake pedal and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously |
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather: Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling
is harmful to engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop to low temperatures, where the fuel injected may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can
enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use suitable fuel (Petrol/Diesel)
which will be available at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for details.
Coolant in the radiator will survive up to ambient temperature of -15 degree C. If the ambient temperature is expected go
below -15 degree C, during operation, the engine will require a different coolant/coolant concentration. Contact a Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for assistance.
6.3 Stopping the Engine
Your vehicle is powered by a turbo engine. Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle
speed and run for few seconds. This assures proper cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary
after any hard driving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below mentioned
safety tips.
Manual Transmission-MT
| • | Keep your right foot on the brake pedal |
| • | Turn front wheels towards the road curb |
| • | Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key |
| • | Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only) |
| • | Engage the parking brake / EPB |
| • | Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if parking on an incline). |
| • | Slowly release the brake pedal |
| • | Lock your vehicle when leaving |
Automatic Transmission
| • | Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal |
| • | Turn front wheels towards the road curb |
| • | Engage the parking brake / EPB |
| • | Shift the gear lever to Park “P” position |
| • | Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key |
| • | Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only) |
| • | Slowly release the brake pedal |
| • | Lock your vehicle when leaving |
Alert will be displayed in the infotainment screen if the gear shifter is not in P position. Engine will not switch off unless
shifter is in P position.
6.4 Exhaust Gases
Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior is considered in the design of the exhaust system.
| • | Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These are potential environmental and health hazards |
| • | Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a colorless and odorless gas and can cause unconsciousness or even death |
| • | If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
| • | Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases |
| • | Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material |
Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to serious
respiratory problems and/or death
6.5 Driving Your Vehicle
6.5.1 Pedals
|
MT |
AT |
 |
 |
|
A: Accelerator Pedal
|
B: Brake Pedal
|
C: Clutch Pedal
|
6.5.2 General Driving Precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to
your vehicle.
| • | Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully |
| • | Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system |
| • | If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer if necessary |
| • | Never overload or improperly load your vehicle |
| • | Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices |
| • | Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres |
| • | Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits |
| • | While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle |
| • | Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles center of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable |
| • | Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle |
| • | Always slowdown in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control |
| • | When driving in off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis |
| • | Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes |
| • | If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs |
| • | Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice |
| • | If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface |
| • | It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly |
| • | In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel |
6.5.3 Off-Road Driving Precautions
| • | When driving in off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury |
| • | Always maintain steering wheel control, Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion |
| • | Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area |
| • | Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water |
6.5.4 If your vehicle is submerged
If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to over the bumper
 |
Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to check
any entry of water into the engine
|
All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician.
| • | Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line |
| • | The engine could get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water |
| • | Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water |
6.5.5 Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water.
Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow
water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting drivability, safety, emissions, and
reliability.
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with out pressing accelerator
pedal and control speed using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water
waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.
You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, impairing
your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control
in the vehicle.
| • | The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it |
| • | Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes |
| • | When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water |
| • | Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission, and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required |
| • | Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission |
| • | Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal |
| • | When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water |
6.5.6 Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow
rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine the exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.
6.5.7 After Driving Off-Road or through Water
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection
after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
| • | After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages |
| • | Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard at high temperatures. |
| • | Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages |
| • | Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned |
| • | We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Mahindra Authorised Dealer for any water entry into the transmission / axle or the engine. |
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking
power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
| • | If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible |
| • | After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated |
6.6 Tips for Better Fuel Economy
Fuel mileage (efficiency) depends on the average speed of the vehicle, number of times the gears are shifted/Clutch pressed
and number of times the brakes are applied. Vehicles operating in city traffic condition /bumper to bumper traffic will exhibit
lower fuel mileage as compared to vehicles operating in open highways with higher average speeds.
DOs
| • | Ensure that your vehicle is maintained as per recommendation (Refer to Warranty and Service Information Guide) |
| • | Ensure that the tyre pressures are as per recommendation (Ref to sticker on door pillar or Page 6-56 or Warranty and Service Information Guide) |
| • | Ensure parking brakes are released fully |
| • | Use Engine Start-Stop feature to the maximum (Ref Page no 6-29), if applicable |
| • | Drive with all the windows closed to reduce aerodynamic drag |
| • | Accelerate smoothly with a light foot on the accelerator |
| • | Anticipate stops and slow down in coasting mode before applying brake |
| • | In manual transmission, shift gears at the right speeds (Ref page 6-15 for gear shift indication prompts) |
Don'ts
| • | Fitting roof carrier will increase drag and reduce fuel mileage |
| • | Driving at speeds above 80 Kms/hr reduces fuel mileage |
| • | Do not rest the left foot on the clutch pedal in manual transmission vehicles as it will reduce the fuel mileage as well as damage clutch/transmission components |
| • | Do not attempt to use brakes with the left foot in Automatic transmission vehicles |
Managing the Air conditioner for optimum fuel efficiency
Recommended AC modes for obtaining optimum fuel efficiency.
|
MX/AX3/AX5 |
AX7/AX7L |
 |
 |
How to Measure /Read Fuel Mileage Values?
| • | The Fuel mileage value is displayed in the cluster as AFE (Average Fuel Economy) in Kms/lit. |
| • | The AFE can be set to multiple modes. |
| • | Refer to Page 3-12 for the procedure for resetting AFE modes. |
6.7 Ignition Switch (if equipped)
 |
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring
will illuminate the moment the driver door is opened and will remain glowing till the driver door is closed.
|
The different positions of the ignition switch are:
LOCK - This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The steering
wheel is also locked, and the key can be removed from the ignition only in this position.
ACC - The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position, all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you
want to listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
ON - All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of
the lamps will go out after a few seconds, some will continue to remain ON till the engine is started. When the vehicle is
being driven, ignition switch remains in the ON position.
Do not leave the ignition in ON when the engine is OFF. This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
START - This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned
to start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is running, release the key, and the key reverts back to
ON position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side to side and try again.
The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the key is removed, the steering column lock is activated, and the
steering wheel cannot be turned.
Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove the key when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key allows
the steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of the vehicle and may cause serious accident. Remove the key only when
the vehicle is parked.
6.8 Horn
Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn.
The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.
|
|
Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed
It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 sec of continuously pressing.
|
If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will get deactivate after 10 sec.
6.9 Manual Transmission
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop
with the initial few hundred kilometers of running.
6.9.1 Gear Lever
 |
Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six forward and one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on
the gear lever knob.
|
The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears, so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.
6.9.2 Gear Recommendation
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.
Based on the various parameters, it will suggest to change the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.
|
Display |
|
|---|---|
|
High |
Low |
|
|
|
Operating Condition
The numeral is the suggested gear. The Up or down arrow is to upshift or downshift. When no arrow, it indicates vehicle is
in which gear.
6.9.3 Neutral Position
This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and brakes released,
the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep
the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is standstill for longer
durations with the engine idling.
Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you
will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position. Always engage manual parking brake/EPB before leaving the
vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.
6.9.4 Gears 1-6
Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated
in the cluster.
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts
or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.
6.9.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds
Upshifting - Diesel
| Shift Range | Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) | Engine RPM Range |
|---|---|---|
|
1–2 |
16 |
1600–2000 |
|
2–3 |
27 |
|
|
3–4 |
42 |
|
|
4–5 |
54 |
|
|
5–6 |
70 |
Downshifting -Diesel
| Shift Range | Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) | Engine RPM Range |
|---|---|---|
|
2–1 |
14 |
1000–1200 |
|
3–2 |
25 |
|
|
4–3 |
40 |
|
|
5–4 |
52 |
|
|
6–5 |
61 |
Upshifting - Petrol
| Shift Range | Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) | Engine RPM Range |
|---|---|---|
|
1–2 |
18 |
1600–2300 |
|
2–3 |
30 |
|
|
3–4 |
44 |
|
|
4–5 |
54 |
|
|
5–6 |
70 |
Downshifting -Petrol
| Shift Range | Vehicle Road Speed (kmph) | Engine RPM Range |
|---|---|---|
|
2–1 |
14 |
1000–1200 |
|
3–2 |
25 |
|
|
4–3 |
40 |
|
|
5–4 |
52 |
|
|
6–5 |
61 |
Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard the transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s frequently.
When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking
brake/EPB in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front wheels towards the road
curb.
6.9.6 Reverse
 |
This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction. Move the gear lever into this position only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.
|
The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to
the reverse (R) position.
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you to wait approximately for three seconds in neutral gear to shifting into or
out of reverse gear.
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged
stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the Parking brake/EPB. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat build up.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever,
which could result in an accident or serious injury.
On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift to obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control.
6.9.7 Uphill and Downhill Driving
To prevent the engine from high stress at a low RPM when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift
when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Similarly, while driving downhill, downshift to utilize
the engine braking in an optimum manner. While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate
gear to reduce aggressive and sustained brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures
and fading.
6.10 Automatic Transmission (AT)
6.10.1 Gear Selector Lever
 |
Your vehicle is equipped with 6 Speed automatic transmission having Electric controls with an Adaptive Transmission Control
Strategy.
|
This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal transmission operation and shift quality in different driving conditions.
The transmission electric are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This
is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred kms of running.
|
P : Park position |
M : Manual Shift |
|
R : Reverse position |
M+ : Manual up-shift |
|
N : Neutral position |
M- : Manual down shift |
|
D : Drive position |
Shift Logic Table
| Movement | Possibility |
|
P-R |
Yes-Brake pedal + knob button |
|
R-N |
No |
|
N-D |
No |
|
D-M |
No |
|
M-D |
No |
|
D-N |
No |
|
N-R |
Yes-Only knob button |
|
R-P |
Yes-Only knob button |
The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of the cluster display.
6.10.2 P : Park Position
 |
Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time.
|
To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake pedal, then press knob button and move the TGS to R or N or D as
desired.
| • | Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P” |
| • | Never shift to “P” when the vehicle is moving, To avoid damage to transmission |
| • | If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come to stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will be heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not recommend moving to P till the vehicle has come to standstill . As repeated such instances can damage the internal parts |
| • | To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without the two procedures may damage the selector lever |
6.10.3 R : Reverse position
 |
Use this position to drive the vehicle in reverse
To shift into “R” from “P” or “N” (with the knob button press), completely stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal. When
the shift lever is in “R”, parking aid system will be automatically activated.
|
| • | Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving |
| • | Please note that the vehicle may slowly move backward when the selector lever is at “R” |
6.10.4 N : Neutral position
 |
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However,
for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
|
| • | Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minutes when the ambient temperature is below -15°C. Otherwise, shifting of gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not be smooth |
| • | If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral position, depress the brake pedal firmly |
| • | Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the vehicle is in motion |
Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from “N” to “D” or “R” for your safety.
For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to N or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table
for more clarity.
6.10.5 D : Drive position
 |
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gear according
to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal
|
| • | Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle immediately after shifting into “D” or the transmission will be damaged. Wait for D symbol to come in the cluster before pressing the accelerator pedal |
| • | Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake |
| • | Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level ground when the selector lever is in “D” even without pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is known as forward creep |
6.10.6 M : Manual Shift
 |
To shift to manual mode move the lever in left side from “D” position. Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the shift
lever in front or back direction.
|
In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift from 1 to 6 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front or back
direction.
Shift up: Move the shift lever forward towards + direction and release once to shift up one gear.
Shift Down: Move the shift lever backwards towards - direction and release once to shift up one gear.
The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the Accelerator pedal.
In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. Similarly, upshifts are automatically made
when the engine rpm exceeds the threshold.
When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the gear to 2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction.
For safety reason maximum three shifts “+” / ”-” can be allowed at given point of time.
| • | Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that the shift lever is in the P (park) position |
| • | Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle |
| • | Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position (other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle |
| • | The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be performed while the vehicle is moving |
| • | Never press accelerator pedal when moving the gear shifter lever |
| • | To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever/ tip switch is operated |
Use of Engine Brake: To use the engine as a brake, change into the manual gear shift mode first, then operate the shift lever to switch to next
lower gear.
| • | Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may make the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on roads covered with snow or ice |
6.10.7 Ignition Key Interlock system (If equipped)
 |
The Ignition Key cannot be removed from the key barrel unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
|
If the key is stuck in the key barrel due to an malfunction, remove fuse F43 from ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX to release the key. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.
Always start the engine while the selector lever is in P or N with Brake pedal depressed.
During operation of the key interlock system, click noise will be audible, which is normal.
6.10.8 Gear Shift Interlock system
The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P into R unless the Brake
Pedal is depressed
 |
 |
In case of malfunction of the shift lock system or vehicle battery got drained, Open up the shift lock cap which is present
in front of the shift lever on the shift bezel. Then with the help of Screw driver available in toolkit, Press the butoon
and move the shift lever out of P mode.
6.10.9 Starting and Driving Off
| • | Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”. For your safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so. |
| • | Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or “R”. |
| • | To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually. |
| • | Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed |
| • | When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement can damage the drive train |
| • | HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated |
| • | For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped |
| • | Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selector |
| • | If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal fully |
| • | To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion |
| • | A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm becomes stable |
| • | When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on, with the brake pedal depressed |
| • | Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at the same time |
| • | We suggest that right leg only should be used for brake pedal operation |
6.10.10 Creep Function
Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other
than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy
traffic or narrow areas.
On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep
effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal
6.10.11 Kick-down Function
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automatically
engaged. This is called the kickdown function.
| • | Do not use the kick-down function while driving on slippery or sharply curved roads |
| • | If you use the kick-down function too frequently, the fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse |
6.10.12 Engine Braking
When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in motion, the engine speed decreases. On a down hill, engaging
a lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using engine behavior as
a brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the higher braking
force.
Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock
or the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force
Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear selector lever is in the “N” position
Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tyres may slip
6.10.13 Limp Home Mode (LHM)
When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also
to prevent critical transmission damage. This status is indicated by the transmission check lamp illumination in the instrument
cluster. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is activated.
6.11 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation (if equipped)
 |
In an AWD vehicle, power is transmitted to all the wheels. This is managed by the AWD System which intelligently transfers
torque to all four wheels.
|
AWD system includes electromagnetically operated clutch which is controlled by an ECU. According to the driving conditions,
this system automatically delivers torque to the rear wheels.
6.11.1 AWD System
AWD system is available in two operating positions viz., AUTO mode and AWD LOCK mode.
Once the ignition key is turned ON, AWD system by default turns into AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, whenever a slippage is detected
in the FRONT wheels (slippery surfaces like icy roads, wet surfaces, etc.) the torque is transferred to the REAR wheels by
the AWD system.
6.11.2 AWD Lock Mode
The AWD LOCK mode is to transfer a portion of the drive torque to the rear wheels for increased traction on wet pavement,
snow covered roads or when driving off road.
Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is always important that the driver carefully
reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those conditions.
Use lock mode when driving up or down steep inclines, driving off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximize
traction.
AWD LOCK button is located on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the switch turns ON when the AWD Lock is activated.
In this mode, fixed amount of torque is transferred to the rear wheels irrespective of the driving condition.
The AWD warning lamp in the cluster illuminates when there is a malfunction in the AWD system.
In AWD Lock mode, when vehicle speed > 80 km/h, then system changes to AUTO mode automatically .
When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (AWD LOCK indicator light goes off).
Driving on normal roads with the AWD LOCK mode, especially, when cornering may cause mechanical noise or vibration. The noise
and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Prolong driving with the noise and vibration may damage
some parts of the power train.
AWD vehicles have to be towed only with loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing. If vehicle
needs to be towed by lifting the front wheels, then the propeller shaft needs to be disconnected in order to protect the coupling.
Do not use the AWD lock mode on dry paved roads. Doing so can cause abnormal noise or vibration, and may damage the AWD system.
When the vehicle is stuck in the snow , sand or mud, place a non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction
OR Slowly spin the wheels in forward and reverse directions which causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle. However,
avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm, doing so may damage the AWD system.
6.12 Drive Modes (Only for Diesel Variant)
Use any of the following methods to activate Drive mode
Center Fascia Switch Bank
Press Drive mode hard switch on center fascia switch bank and select required drive mode from Infotainment Screen
Infotainment Home Screen
Select Drive mode icon from Infotainment Home screen and select required drive mode as shown in the image below.
Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust
driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go. The system is incredibly easy to use, simply chose you choice of
"Drive Mode" and experience 3 different vehicles in one.
You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when
the situation calls for it. Whether you're looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode allows
you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.
Drive Modes essentially offers you the Driver a Drive Experience of 3 different cars in one car.
| • | You can choose ZAP mode to experience a TRUE SUV drive, a drive that is true to the Mahindra SUV experience. This is the default mode. |
| • | You can choose ZIP mode for a normal comfortable city drive. The Engine Power and shift points (in AT) will be suitable for traffic conditions. |
| • | You can choose ZOOM Mode for the Adrenaline Rush. Engine Power, Gear shifts , Braking will all work together to give you an absolute THRILL to your driving experience. |
Driving Modes changes vehicle handling, dynamics and entire Drive Feel at a touch of an icon. This essentially enables Driver
to experience multiple calibrations seamlessly.
Driving modes alters
| 1. | Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with engine power delivery |
| 2. | Gear shift patterns |
| 3. | Steering effort |
| 4. | TCS Control |
Based on the mode selected driving
ZAP Mode: ZAP Mode offers regular everyday performance. The car runs like a true Mahindra should. It offers a good balance between ZIP
and ZOOM settings and is ideal for day-to-day use. The vehicle will be default in ZAP mode every time the vehicle Ignition
is turned ON. This is the default mode.
ZIP Mode: ZIP mode is the accelerator pedal response and shift points (in AT) have been modified so as to have comfortable and easy
control for traffic condition.
ZOOM Mode: This mode is for a more spirited driving. ZOOM mode is offered to make the car more fun, as it produces more engaging and
potent ride-quality. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i.e. the car accelerates more readily. The steering
gets heavier, Gear shift and is delayed.
Once any of the modes is selected, we would have an ALERT message in cluster. Based on the mode selected the Alert message
would vary. for
ZAP: ZAP MODE ACTIVATED
ZIP: ZIP MODE ACTIVATED
ZOOM: ZOOM MODE ACTIVATED
Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the CLUSTER. Also, the skin of the cluster also changes as per the mode.
Allows the driver to alter settings to their specific preferences. This option offers further flexibility over choices of
Drive Modes.
This is done by means of CUSTOM MODES available in Infotainment screens.
Here, the Customer is provided with Selection option from choices as seen below
Power train : ZIP , ZAP or ZOOM
Braking : ZAP or ZOOM
Steering: ZIP or ZAP or ZOOM
HVAC : Normal or Economy
Once the customer selects his/her choice from drop down on confirming his/her choice. Each of the individual controllers will
switch to this selection.
Few things to note
| 1. | When in Cruise control or Adaptive cruise control Vehicle will always be defaulted to ZAP MODE |
| 2. | ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in ZAP MODE |
| 3. | IN case of any faults at vehicle level , that doesn't allow the vehicle to be in the mode of choice Customer is alerted by an alert message – “DRIVE MODE INHIBITED” in Infotainment screen and the Mode choice in the Cluster would be Blank. |
6.13 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start System) – MT/AT (If equipped)
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in
turn gives a better fuel efficiency.
6.13.1 Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System – MT
 |
Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button
indicates the status of the button.
|
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic
junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
| • | The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System |
| • | Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately |
| • | The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on |
For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
| • | Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch |
| • | Bonnet is fully closed |
| • | In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once |
| • | Current status of the engine is idling |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released |
| • | Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition |
| • | Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine |
| • | Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C |
| • | Gear in neutral |
| • | DPF REGEN should not be in active state |
| • | Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34l |
| • | OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition |
For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
| • | Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System |
| • | Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully de-pressed |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Engine Stop/Start System is in active state |
| • | Bonnet should be closed |
6.13.2 Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System – AT
|
|
Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button
indicates the status of the button.
|
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic
junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
| • | The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the “D” Mode and the brake pedal is pressed |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System |
| • | Once the signal turns green, release the brake pedal and the engine starts immediately |
| • | The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on |
For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
| • | Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch |
| • | Bonnet is fully closed |
| • | In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 10 kmph at least once |
| • | Current status of the engine is idling |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Brake pedal is fully pressed |
| • | Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition |
| • | Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine |
| • | Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C |
| • | Gear shift Lever in ‘D’ mode |
| • | Vehicle should not be in slope |
| • | DPF REGEN should not be in active state |
| • | Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34l |
| • | AT Warning telltale in OFF condition |
| • | OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition |
For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met:
| • | Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System |
| • | Gear lever is in ‘D’ mode and brake pedal is fully released |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Engine Stop/Start System is in active state |
| • | Bonnet should be closed |
6.13.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
| 1. | What is the advantage of the system? The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs.
However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.
|
| 2. | What are the other advantages of the system?
|
| 3. | Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for the first time? No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the
system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal in MT
|
| 4. | How to activate/deactivate the system? The system is activated by default during every ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates
the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the Engine Stop/Start switch.
|
| 5. | Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is started the first time with the ignition key? No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in
the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.
|
| 6. | What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my engine at traffic signals/jams? The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank.
|
| 7. | Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched off? No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be in operation when the ignition is ON.
|
| 8. | What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at traffic signals/jams? The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving
the vehicle immediately.
|
| 9. | When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be switched off? If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery
from further draining.
|
| 10. | Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal ignition key? Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible.
|
| 11. | Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear for MT? The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the
gear lever.
|
| 12. | Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic? No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is zero.
|
| 13. | Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the engine shuts down? No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can continue to enjoy the music.
|
| 14. | Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is pressed in MT? No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not attempt to re-crank.
|
| 15. | If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen? The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass
mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.
|
6.14 Fuel-BS VI
 |
For Diesel: Use commercially available vehicular Ultra-low Sulfur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (IS 1460; 2017 BS VI specification
or equivalent). Information on diesel quality can normally be found in the fuel pump.
|
Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found. If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content
(more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and emission warranty issues.
For Petrol (Manual Transmission) - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel conforming to IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification or equivalent (With Maximum 10%
Ethanol content - E10 fuel) Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling
station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found.
For Petrol (Automatic Transmission) - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel conforming to IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification or equivalent and / or E20 fuel
confirming to IS17021;2018 specification. In either case of fuel, minimum Research Octane Number (RON) to be 95. Information
on Petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the
pump cannot be found.
Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling
Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident
Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with alcohol based fuels, kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and exhaust
system components.
If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or non- approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an Authorized
Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.
6.14.1 Fuelling during Winter
During freezing weather, if fuel is not winterised or is insufficiently winterised, waxing/gelling may start in fuel, leading
to interruption in fuel supply to engine. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather
conditions, use winterised ULSD which are available at the filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer
for further details.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapours and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with diesel /Petrol or the inhalation
of fuel vapour may affect your health.
Diesel/Petrol is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flames
or smoking materials near diesel/Petrol. Turn OFF the engine before refuelling. Whenever you are around diesel/Petrol, extinguish
all smoking materials.
6.14.2 Minimum Fuel Requirement
It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litres of fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is
empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.
Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.
6.15 Brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and rear wheels.
Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency.
After a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the film
of water from the brake disc.
| 1. | Front brake pad : The Front brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on cluster will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible |
| 2. | Rear Brake Pad : The rear brake pads are equipped with Mechanical Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, there will be a metallic rubbing noise from the rear brake pads. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible |
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much
harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than usual
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases considerably while braking
Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal
can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet,
snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern
Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise which occurs in AT vehicles when the vehicle is ON and D/R mode
is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle
6.15.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline
If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing the uphill, select first gear for MT vehicle & park position for AT
vehicles and also turn the front wheels away from the kerb.
If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the
kerb.
Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
 |
When parking on an uphill, turn the front wheels away from the Kerb/Pavement
|
 |
When parking on a downhill, turn the front wheels towards the Kerb/Pavement.
|
While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate gear to reduce aggressive and sustained
brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures and fading.
6.15.2 Parking Brake – Manual (if equipped)
 |
To apply the parking brake, pull the park brake lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the parking brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
|
To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the lever tip and lower
the parking brake lever completely.
The parking brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill; first apply
the parking brake; after that shift the TGS lever to the P position (for AT) and gear for MT. This will avoid the load on
the transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive
heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel efficiency lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal
| • | Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident |
| • | Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in personal injury |
| • | Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to accidents |
| • | The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle |
6.16 Electric Parking Brake-EPB (if equipped)
The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) is a safety feature with enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied/released by simple
switch operation.
The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking brake which requires high effort to apply & release.
In addition to the switch based Apply, EPB also provides additional safety/comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto release,
Auto vehicle hold, Controlled deceleration for parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp.
6.16.1 Applying EPB
 |
Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull up the EPB switch.
|
The parking brake warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned on, indicating
that the parking brake is applied.
6.16.2 Releasing EPB
 |
Press down the EPB switch with the brake pedal depressed.
|
The parking brake warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned off, indicating
that the parking brake is released.
6.16.3 AUTO Apply EPB
For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will get automatically applied in the following conditions.
| 1. | Ignition is turned Off. |
| 2. | AT vehicle –gear shifted to Park |
| 3. | Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver door open. |
| 4. | Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver seat belt unbuckled. |
| 5. | Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and AVH switch pressed to release AVH Active state. |
| 6. | Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in active state continuously for more than 5 minutes |
| 7. | Auto vehicle hold (AVH) active and engine turned OFF by engine start stop feature |
How to override EPB Auto Apply – MT
If in any case, EPB auto apply feature needs to be overridden, it can be achieved by a simple switch-based operation, which
is mentioned below:
| 1. | Stop the vehicle |
| 2. | Push and hold EPB switch in release position |
| 3. | Holding the EPB switch in released position, turn the ignition OFF |
| 4. | This prevents EPB from automatically getting applied |
In any case, where the vehicle needs to be moved in ignition OFF condition, EPB auto apply override feature to be utlilized.
In case of any Switch related failure when vehicle in standstill, the EPB Auto release feature must be used to release EPB,
if EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work, contact Service center in such cases to release the EPB
How to override EPB Auto Apply – AT
EPB manual override feature can be used to push the vehicle after turning the ignition OFF or in any breakdown condition.
| • | Position TGS lever in neutral (N). |
| • | Push and hold the EPB switch, simultaneously press and hold the start stop button (SSB) till ignition is turned OFF. |
| • | This operation prevents EPB auto apply and EPB will be in disengaged state. |
In this case, vehicle remains in accessory state (SSB LED in amber color) before completely getting turned OFF, for 30 seconds
or till driver door is opened.
6.16.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away
For Automatic Transmission Vehicles (AT)
| 1. | Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt. |
| 2. | Shift the gear selector lever to the D / M or R position |
| 3. | Release the brake pedal and then depress the accelerator pedal slowly. |
| 4. | The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle. |
| 5. | The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released. |
For Manual Transmission Vehicles (MT)
| 1. | Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt. |
| 2. | Shift the gear to forward or reverse gear. |
| 3. | Then slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the Accelerator pedal to drive away. |
| 4. | The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle. |
| 5. | The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released. |
The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated if driver door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened.
The driver will get message on cluster to ensure the same.
If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal , be cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if
an aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESP to intervene.
6.16.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Lamp
|
|
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when EPB is applied properly. |
|
|
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when there is a malfunction in the EPB system. |
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorized Service
Centre
Do’s
Driving Conditions
| • | For EPB Auto release and Drive Away always wear driver seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed |
| • | In MT vehicles, drive away with clutch alone modulation not possible, thus always modulate the clutch pedal and accelerator pedal for effective drive away. |
Don’ts
Driving Conditions
| • | If the EPB Malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is engaged. Do not drive. |
| • | Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the vehicle checked in workshop. |
Servicing: Do not get your vehicle serviced at an unauthorized service center.
| • | The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking. Release the accelerator and Pull and hold the EPB button until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets applied. This should be done only in emergency condition and not as a regular action. |
| • | The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in dynamic condition |
| • | The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the driver door or the seat belt is not fastened. |
| • | Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this is normal behavior. |
| • | If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre. |
| • | Do not let children or other people who are not familiar with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle. |
| • | If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related components after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle checked and serviced |
6.17 Auto Vehicle Hold/Auto Hold (AVH) (if equipped)
The AVH is a comfort feature offered with Electric parking brake.
The function of AVH is to hold the vehicle in standstill with the applied driver brake pressure
Once AVH switch is pressed, it remains in memory and thus driver doesn’t have to press AVH switch every time
The AVH feature can exist in 4 states in the vehicle, which are as follows.
|
AVH Off – AVH switch is not pressed, thus AVH is not available.
|
|
|
|
AVH Standby – AVH is available but is in standby mode.
|
|
|
AVH Active – AVH is available and is controlling/holding the vehicle in standstill.
|
|
|
AVH Faulty – Indicates some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available
|
For the AUTO HOLD to function, the following conditions should be met.
| • | Engine ON |
| • | Driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled. |
When AVH is active and Driver door is opened/Driver seat belt is unbuckled, the EPB gets automatically applied for safety
reasons.
6.17.1 Activation of AVH
 |
|
The LED indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch is illuminated in Amber color.
6.17.2 Deactivation of AVH
|
|
Press the AUTO HOLD switch with AUTO HOLD activated to deactivate the feature
|
Operating Auto hold
| 1. | Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD indicator on cluster (white). |
| 2. | Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle. |
| 3. | The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster is changed from white to green and the brake is applied. |
| 4. | Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off. |
| 5. | The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster is changed from green to white and the brake is released. |
If the AUTO HOLD function remains active for more than 5 minutes or if the driver door is opened/seat belt is unbuckled the
EPB applies automatically and AVH is disabled.
| • | When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly and on uphill sufficient accelerator pedal input to be provided for overcoming the gradient. |
| • | Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is released, and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly |
| • | If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre. If parking the vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector lever to the P position |
Controlled Deceleration for Parking (CDP)
| • | The Controlled Deceleration for parking is a safety feature. |
| • | The CDP functions can be made used in any case such as Brake pedal/Brake Booster/Master Cylinder failure because of which sufficient brake force can’t be achieved through the brake pedal. |
| • | In such conditions, pulling the EPB Switch triggers the ESP Control unit to generate a pressure build up in the brake system which produces the braking force at individual wheels to bring the vehicle to an emergency stop. |
| • | For unintentional application, if the codriver or any other person pulls the EPB switch without driver’s notice in dynamic condition, The CDP function can be overridden by the driver by pressing Accelerator pedal. |
| • | The CDP functionality having a high rate of deceleration, anyone other than the driver must be advised not to pull the EPB switch in any case while driving. |
| • | The CDP function is a safety feature and must be used in the cases of emergency only. |
EPB Roll Away Re-clamp
| • | If the EPB system detects any rolling after EPB is applied, the motor on caliper re-clamps the disc to avoid any rolling. |
| • | As an added feature, to avoid roll away due the reduction in clamp force due to decrease in temperature, the EPB motor on caliper re-clamps the disc multiple times based on the temperature. |
Servicing and Repairing
The EPB is a complex system involving electrical and hydraulics, it is strictly advised to get it repaired or serviced in
a Mahindra Authorized service Centre .
6.17.3 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert
| Display | Operating Conditions |
|---|---|
 |
This message is displayed on the Cluster when the EPB switch is released without depressing the brake pedal to deactivate
EPB.
|
 |
This message is displayed on the Cluster in the following conditions:
1. When the accelerator pedal is depressed to auto release EPB, with EPB Applied and driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.
2. When the AVH switch is depressed to activate AVH, with driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled. |
6.18 Hazard on Panic Braking
Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 seconds when the following conditions are met:
| • | Ignition is ON |
| • | Vehicle speed is greater than 60 kmph |
| • | Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed |
6.19 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle
during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed
sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle
to be steered during braking.
The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over
and prevents wheel lock.
During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor
noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping
the brake pedal.
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp
does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking
system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer.
The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:
| • | Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads |
| • | Driving with tyre chains installed |
| • | Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road |
| • | Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height |
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control,
it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.
If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock
Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up
6.20 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the
wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip,
the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined
as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
6.21 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for
over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.
ESP uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle , compares it to the actual path
of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel
to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
 |
Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
|
The ESP cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to
the prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s
safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.
6.21.1 ESP ON
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp will blink in the instrument cluster.
When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that braking
had gone to ABS zone. Suggest that the driver should slow down the speed are not matching the road surface.
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESP system controls the engine
RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.
6.21.2 ESP OFF
 |
In some driving conditions, to maximize traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESP.
|
Such conditions are:
| • | To start in deep snow or on a loose surface |
| • | Driving in deep sand |
| • | Driving through deep mud etc. |
To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on the driver control switch bank. Once ESP OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.
For safety reasons, ESP will be automatically re-activated once the vehicle speed crosses 64 kmph
Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all normal driving conditions.
When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control),
DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be available
ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.
If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESP is working. However If this lamp is blinking continuously
or remains ON, it indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Drive carefully to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer and
get the ESP system checked.
6.22 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (If equipped)
The HBA function is designed to optimize the vehicles braking ability during emergency braking situations, the system detects
a panic braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and generates an additional brake-force boost
to the driver if required.
During a panic braking situation, the brake pressure is raised to the locking pressure. For the HBA to become active, the
brake Pedal must be pressed throughout the braking maneuver, that is the brakes must not be pumped and released.
The HBA function gets deactivated, when the brake pedal is released thus do not release brake pressure unless braking is no
longer needed
| • | The HBA system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HBA equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could risk the user’s safety. |
| • | The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HBA feature to prevent accidents. |
6.23 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped)
 |
This System assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without
driver's input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control
|
During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.
HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates
indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.
The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 8 kmph to 35 kmph, Above 35 kmph the HDC feature will go to ready mode.
The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 kmph. (For Activating the HDC feature again,
the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits)
The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental intervention
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake pedal.
To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:
| • | SET Speed — This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake/accelerator pedals.(example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 kmph, then set speed will be 30 kmph). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set value). |
| • | If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 kmph to 34 kmph and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 kmph |
| • | Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 kmph to 10 kmph and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 kmph |
| • | If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 kmph) |
The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect
is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.
6.24 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped)
Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are
chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.
Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 seconds
in MT and 1 seconds in AT vehicles after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal
The Following conditions must be met in order for the HHC to activate:
| 1. | The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC |
| 2. | The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient |
| 3. | The Parking brake must not be applied |
The HHC will function on both vehicle facing Up hill and vehicle facing downhill, provided the correct gears are selected.
| • | Vehicle Facing Uphill – Gear should be in Forward |
| • | Vehicle Facing Downhill – Gear should be in Reverse |
| • | In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur. |
| • | The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling. |
6.25 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC)
Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between the
brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading.
HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake pressure and deceleration
rate, to reduce the braking distances in such cases.
The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force application.
| • | The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety. |
| • | The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road accidents. |
6.26 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)
Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function
analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then
applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.
In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral forces
that will lead to a critical roll moment about the center of gravity.
Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 kmph
Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 kmph
| • | Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. |
| • | The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. |
6.27 Brake Disc Wiping
When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response
time.
The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake
disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.
For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
| 1. | Vehicle speed above 70kmph. |
| 2. | Accelerator Pedal must be pressed. |
| 3. | The Wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed) |
The Pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.
| • | The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles. |
| • | It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal. |
6.28 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP
EBP is a value-added feature in ESP, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low
brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.
The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator
pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration
is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.
6.29 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM)
The SCM feature in the ESP system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first
collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle
movement.
For the Second Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
| 1. | There must be a front collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed |
| 2. | The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h. |
| 3. | The brakes, the ESP and other required electrical systems remain functional after impact. |
| 4. | The accelerator pedal must not be actuated. |
6.30 Driver Drowsiness Detection System (DDD)
The Driver Drowsiness Detection system advises the driver to take a break from continuous long duration driving when driver
fatigue can be detected based on the driver's steering behavior.
The system evaluates the steering behavior at speeds of 60-200 km/h.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system are as follows.
| • | The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off. |
| • | The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed, and the driver's door opened. |
| • | The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes. |
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after
15 minutes.
The Drowsiness alert should be enabled in the driver assistance screen.
Pause Recommendation
 |
This alert comes in the display of instrument cluster when the system detects the driver is quiet sleepy or very sleepy,
along with audible signal.
|
| • | When the vehicle is driven continuously for more than 2 hours and if the system detects driver as “Quite Sleepy”, an alert message along with audio signal appears in the instrument cluster. Cluster will display the alert message till the user presses the “OK” button from steering wheel switch. |
| • | After pressing the OK button, if break is not detected by the system for next 15 minutes, alert message will repeat again. If the drowsiness is continuously sensed and if the system detects driver as “Very Sleepy”, next level alert message & audio signal will be triggered along with steering wheel haptic feedback. |
Driver Attention Level: The Driver attention level is calculated based on driving behavior and many external parameters and the attention level is
displayed to the driver in the Drive Info Tab
|
Driver Attention Level |
Description |
|---|---|
|
|
Very Awake
|
|
|
Quite Awake
|
|
|
Neither Awake nor Sleepy
|
|
|
Quite Sleepy
|
|
|
Very Sleepy
|
| • | The driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if you feel tired. |
| • | The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed. |
| • | Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips. |
| • | There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep. |
| • | In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behavior incorrectly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation. |
| • | The system is designed primarily for use on highways. |
6.31 Wheels and Tyres
6.31.1 Tyre Information
 |
A: RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE
B: “TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”
C: TYRE SIZE
D: MAX. LOAD LIMIT
E: TREAD WEAR
|
6.31.2 Tyre Rating
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding
your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the
tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer directly, or the tyre manufacturer.
The tyre rating of your vehicle is:
| • | 235/65 R17 103/104 V/H |
| • | Optional P235/60 R18 103/104 V/H |
| • | Temporary Spare Tyre T155/90 R18 113M |
Tyre rating is explained as below:
Tyre size (Example: 235/65 R17 104H)
Callout (A) : 235 (Three-digit number) : This number gives the width in millimetres of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.
Callout (B) : 65 (Two-digit number) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.
Callout (C) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.
Callout (D) :17 (Two-digit number) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
Callout (E) :104 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.
Callout (F) : H : Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation
pressure.
6.31.3 Speed Rating
| SPEED SYMBOL | MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY |
|---|---|
| KM/HR | |
|
L |
120 |
|
M |
130 |
|
N |
140 |
|
P |
150 |
|
Q |
160 |
|
R |
170 |
|
S |
180 |
|
T |
190 |
|
U |
200 |
|
H |
210 |
|
V |
240 |
|
W |
270 |
|
Y |
300 |
|
Z |
240+ |
6.31.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)
 |
Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about
tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear tyres.
|
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance,
resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
| Regular Tyre | Temporary Tyre | |
|
Dynamic Rolling radius (mm) |
358 +/- 5 |
358 +/- 5 |
6.31.5 Tyre Pressure
Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are
affected by improper Tyre pressure:
| • | Safety |
| • | Economy |
| • | Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability |
Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns
will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance
and results in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side
inner B-pillar.
6.31.6 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure
The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper
inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated. At the same time, each Tyre should be
inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold Tyre inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is defined
as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour
period. Check Tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as Tyre pressures vary with temperature
changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking
Tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
When it was new, the spare Tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare Tyre can lose pressure over time. In
order to avoid being stranded, check the spare Tyre air pressure frequently.
6.31.7 Inflating Your Tyres
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your Tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a Tyre can lose up to half of
its air pressure without appearing flat.
At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each Tyre and check the Tyre pressure with a Tyre gauge (including spare
Tyre). Inflate all Tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures and may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout”,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the Tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
| • | Over or under inflation may reduce the tyre life |
| • | Do not correct the tyre pressure immediately after the vehicle is stopped after operation, server handling or long distance drive. Check the inflation pressure when the vehicle is idle for 3 hours or 10 minutes of driving after 3 hours in idle condition |
| • | Do not drive the vehicle with lower pressure than recommended, which may lead to over heating of sidewall resulting in tyre damage |
| • | Check the tyre pressures once in a month or before long distance travels |
| • | Check your tyres regularly for any damages or cut on the sidewall. Please replace the tyres immediately. |
Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the Tyre. The recommended Tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side
inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
After inspecting or adjusting the Tyre pressure, always reinstal the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident
and/or personal injury.
6.31.8 Radial Ply Tyres
Combining radial ply Tyres with other types of Tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in
an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial Tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of Tyres.
Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for radial Tyre repairs.
6.31.9 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI)
Tread wear indicators are moulded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes
1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves, the Tyre should be replaced.
Avoid abrupt manoeuvring and braking. This can cause Tyre deterioration and lead to loss of steering or braking control.
6.31.10 Life of Tyre
The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:
| • | Driving style |
| • | Tyre pressure |
| • | Distance driven |
Tyres and the spare Tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning
can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.
Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect Tyres from contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the Tyre placard. Combinations
of unapproved Tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering,
handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control of the vehicle or the Tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
Replacing original Tyres with Tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
6.31.11 Snow Chains
Snow chains cannot be used on these Tyres.
In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter Tyres with the same specifications for better stability,
safety and performance.
6.31.12 Tyre Rotation Recommendations
Type 1 - Applicable for Front wheel Drive Vehicles
 |
Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking
functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.
|
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
Type 2 – Applicable for All wheel Drive Vehicles
It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.
 |
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
|
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
6.31.13 Temporary Spare Wheel
|
Regular Tyre
|
Temporary Tyre
|
 |
 |
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel
| • | Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle. |
| • | Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel simultaneously. |
| • | Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel. |
| • | While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. |
When Temporary Spare Wheel is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
ABS, Cruise control (If equipped), EPS, Rear View monitor system (If equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)
Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident
causing death or serious injury.
| • | The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. |
| • | Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel |
| • | TPMS is not provided in temporary spare wheel |
| • | Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary spare tyre. Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. |
| • | Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre. |
| • | Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre |
| • | The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible. |
| • | Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Mahindra authorised dealer |
6.31.14 Changing a Flat Tyre
Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies chapter for details.
6.31.15 Wheel Tightness
When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or
wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim,
or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel bolts are damaged, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Always tighten the bolts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel bolts.
Never overtighten the bolts on the wheel hub. You could damage the hub or the bolt.
Torque tighten the wheel bolts to the specified value at the nearest Authorised Mahindra Workshop.
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor
Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.
6.32 Tiretronics (if equipped)
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts
the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;
| • | Adequate braking |
| • | Road grip |
| • | Vehicle handling |
| • | Vehicle maneuvering |
| • | Reduced tyre wear and tear |
| • | Reduced tyre strain and safety |
| • | Good fuel efficiency |
The instrument cluster displays all alerts & visual warnings related to Tiretronics system.
|
|
|
6.32.1 Operation of Tiretronics
Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit
the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the instrument cluster.
In the instrument cluster screen all the tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature. Spare tyre (if
TPMS sensor equipped) information on tiretronics screen shall be available only during any alerts and warning in the spare
tyre. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure manually, In certain conditions system may not update pressure for Spare tyre
correctly)
The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and
warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s
parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may
lead to sensor damage.
The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The
system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel
efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and braking ability.
It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.
6.32.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tyre pressure/High
temperature alerts and malfunction.
6.32.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation
 |
First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram
is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer's production line)
|
 |
 |
| 1. | Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in |
| 2. | Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it |
| 3. | The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure |
| 4. | Place the inner tyre bead over the rim |
| 5. | Place the outer tyre bead over the rim |
| 6. | Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle |
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage
it. Start from the opposite direction.
6.32.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal
 |
|
| • | Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown below and turn
the rim clockwise.
|
| • | To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.
|
 |
|
| • | Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb |
| • | Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool |
The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre
tool.
| • | Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool |
| • | Remove existing valve stem |
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it.
Start from the opposite direction.
6.32.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System
| • | Low Pressure Alert |
| • | High Pressure Alert |
| • | High Temperature Alert |
| • | Pressure Leakage Alert |
| • | Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error) |
| • | Tiretronics Sensor Faulty. |
| • | Tyre Auto Learn |
| • | Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) |
| • | Tyre Pressure Imbalance |
Low Pressure Alert
 |
Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.
|
| • | Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold. Low pressure will be set based on the temperature value. |
| • | Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the information screen and alert register screen |
| • | If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air |
| • | Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value |
High Pressure Alert
 |
High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.
|
| • | High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes above threshold |
| • | High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen |
| • | If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value |
| • | The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared |
| • | Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the placard value |
Pressure Leakage Alert
 |
Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.
|
| • | Pressure Leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate greater than defined threshold |
| • | In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too below threshold then the low pressure alert will also be set |
| • | The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running /ignition ON condition |
| • | Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification |
| • | If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions |
Sensor Signal Missing Alert
 |
When the vehicle runs in speed above 40kmph, Tiretronics system receives signal from all the Tiretronics sensor installed
in all running tyres.
|
| • | On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received |
| • | If the Signals from the tiretronics sensor are not received atleast once, when the vehicle is driven at a speed greater than 40kmph for more than 10 minutes, "Signal Missing" alert will be set for the respective tyre and Tiretronics Telltale will be ON. |
| • | When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre |
| • | If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual/auto learning should be done |
Sensor Faulty / Low Battery Alert
Each tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual battery . If the battery level is too low or the sensor
by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall give this alert.
| • | If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor |
| • | Post replacing the new sensor, manual/auto learning should be done |
Tyre Auto Learn Process (If Enabled in cluster)
|
|
|
In case of tyres location changed from its original location, Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure
and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on environmental condition
& vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.
In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings
and alert for new location.
If spare wheel tyre get swapped with any of the running tyres then display shall show Signal missing in the cluster for respective
tyre location and TPMS indication lamp will blink for 90 sec and remain ON. TPMS indication lamp will continue until the error
condition is rectified.
Refer cluster settings for the “TPMS Auto Learn ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) (If Enabled in cluster)
 |
During Air Filling in tyre, Hazard lamps shall blink until placard value reaches.
During air filling If tyre Pressure has reached the Placard Value, then Horn shall activate one time
|
During Air filling If tyre Pressure exceeds Placard Value, then Hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.
Refer cluster settings for the “Tyre Fill Assist ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Pressure Imbalance
 |
During driving if the system identifies tyre Pressure imbalance on front two tyres / Rear two tyres then Instrument Cluster
shall popup Tyre Pressure imbalance warning.
|
 |
 |
6.32.6 Tiretronics Manual Learning
After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp will
be ON, indicating malfunction.
Mandate Points
Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in
to the memory of the receiver module.
| 1. | Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done
|
| 2. | Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres |
| 3. | Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters |
| 4. | It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre. |
| 5. | It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32psi and < 36psi before initiating the manual learning process |
| 6. | Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value |
It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear
right tyre and rear left tyre.
Initiating the Manual Learning Process
 |
1. Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the up button in steering wheel
2. Turn the ignition ON
|
3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate to highest position and then release the enter button in up
position. Then observe the cluster for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle siren will indicate by 2 chrips & 2 times
turn lamps blink and instrument cluster screen shows ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;
| • | Try initiating the manual learning once again |
| • | Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it |
| • | Check if the Enter button is working fine |
If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
 |
Starting from Front Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front left for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt
|
If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
 |
Learning the Front Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
|
If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
 |
Learning the Rear Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
|
If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
 |
Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
|
If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
 |
If rear left tyre is also learned, then 1 siren chirp is heard and ALL tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and
‘All tyres Learned successfully’ in the centre of the screen.
|
 |
If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes
more than 90 secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and show the ‘TPMS Manual Learning
Not Successful’ screen.
|
Limitations
| • | The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear |
| • | The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance |
| • | There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition when interference gets cleared |
6.32.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember
| • | It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge station only |
| • | Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature |
| • | Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:
|
| • | Tiretronics measures pressure of the tyre |
| • | Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max) |
| • | If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated |
| • | If the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, then tires have to be learned via either manual or auto learning. Refer Tyre Auto/Manual learn process in Tiretronics section for more details |
| • | If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure |
| • | Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems |
| • | During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition |
6.32.8 Recommended Playcard Value
|
Ambient Temp. (Deg C) |
Recommended Pressure Front & Rear (32 Psi Placard) |
|
<0
|
28
|
|
10
|
29
|
|
20
|
31
|
|
30
|
32
|
|
40
|
34
|
|
50
|
35
|
|
60
|
37
|
|
70
|
38
|
If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min & is driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tyres
shall be filled to the respective playcard as per the ambient temperature else to the next playcard value.
Example: If a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for 50 min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then
respective play card value will be 32.0 PSI for front & rear. Else 33.5 PSI
6.33 Reverse Parking Assist System (RPAS)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than
8 kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot
be viewed through the internal rear view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will alert the driver by sending
out sound alarms at different frequency and display bars in instrument cluster to indicate proximity of the obstacle from
the vehicle. The alert sound level and the number of display bars is proportional to the distance. Lesser the distance, shorter
the interval between beeps & more number of display bars illuminated.
|
RPAS Sensors
|
|
 |
Two RPAS sensors are located at the rear bumper to assist driver for hassle-free parking.
|
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may
not be accurate.
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
Do not press or apply shock on the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could
be damaged.
6.33.1 Driving and Operation
| • | RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system |
| • | System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level |
| • | Applying paint over the sensor will affect the performance of the system |
Activation & De-activation of RPAS
| • | The vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the reverse parking assistance system |
| • | RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and deactivate when reverse gear is disengaged |
| • | When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the systems starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminate & frequency of beeps increases. |
6.33.2 RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster
 |
RPAS display on the instrument cluster gives the following information:
|
| • | Right zone indicates obstacle on right side |
| • | If obstacle is in centre then both left & Right zone will get highlight |
6.33.3 Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle (IGN is turned ON)
 |
2. Change the gear to reverse (engage the reverse gear).The RPAS will be displayed as like below in the Instrument cluster.
|
3. Start moving the vehicle in the reverse direction
 |
4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path
|
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Instrument cluster. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing
each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
 |
6. The RPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances sensed by left and right sensors. And 120 cm is the maximum
detection range.
|
For Example:
Assume 2 obstacles are placed as mentioned below:
| • | Obstacle at left at 70 cm |
| • | Obstacle at right at 101 cm |
On engaging the gear in reverse, instrument cluster will display as below:
 |
Since obstacle is at 70 cm in left - minimum distance is shown in the distance indicator.
|
Along with this beep sound can be heard from Instrument cluster. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer
and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacles is less than 50 cm.
6.33.4 Pay Attention
 |
1. If display bars in any one of the sides are displayed with cross marks, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
|
 |
2. If all display bars are displayed with cross marks, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
|
 |
3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system.
|
 |
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind your vehicle before reversing. In some cases, the display may be not
as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.
|
 |
5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all.3. Point B will be detected sooner or later,
but A may not be detected at all.
|
 |
6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection
or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
|
 |
7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.
|
 |
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back
to the sensor.
|
 |
9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get deflected away.
|
6.33.5 Limitations of RPAS
| • | System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level |
| • | System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by RPAS |
| • | System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle |
| • | System may give false alert without obstacles while reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle |
| • | System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded |
| • | System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa |
| • | System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded |
| • | System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions |
| • | The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
|
| • | Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible |
| • | Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor |
| • | Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once |
| • | Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights |
| • | Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm |
6.34 Rear View Camera
 |
Rear View Camera is located under tail gate applique.
Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing & manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:
|
| 1. | Normal View |
| 2. | Zoom-in View |
| 3. | Full View |
| 4. | Merged Corner View |
| 5. | Left Corner View |
| 6. | Right Corner View |
| 7. | Static & Dynamic Guidelines |
| 8. | Parking assistance
|
6.34.1 Feature Description
1. Normal View
By selecting Normal View Icon, Rear View camera provides about 130 deg horizontal wide rear view of vehicle's rear surrounding
on the Infotainment screen.
 |
It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only after a distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the
ground will be visible right after 15 cm to 30 cm from Vehicle’s Rear
|
|
2. Zoom-In View
 |
 Press Zoom-In button to view objects closer and press Zoom-Out button to go back to the normal parking view.
|
|
3. Full View/Wider View
 |
 By selecting Full View Icon Rear View camera provides about 170 deg horizontal wide rear view of vehicle's rear surrounding
on the Infotainment screen.
|
Full view is wider than Normal View.
|
4. Merged Corner View
 |
 By selecting Merged Corner Rear View camera provides a wide view focussed on the left and right corners to provide a better
visibility of crossing traffic for safe manouvre.
|
Merged Corner View shows merged view of rear left and right corners.
|
5. Left Corner View
 |
 If user wants to focus on the left side crossing traffic, then "Left Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.
|
Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.
|
6. Right Corner View
 |
 If user wants to focus on the left side crossing traffic, then "Left Corner View" icon can be pressed to select the view.
|
Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner View.
7. Static and Dynamic Guidelines
Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with respect to the parking slot during parking. During parking, compare the Static
guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines to know if vehicle placement is in-line with the parking slot lines.
Color coding on Static lines help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, if Red
color dashed line falls on a object on the floor then the Object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise,
Red solid line indicates 0.5-1mts, Yellow indicates 1-2 mts, and Green indicates 2-3 mts.
 |
Dynamic Guidelines (orange color in below image) indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position. As per the steering
angle movement, dynamic guidelines move and show the vehicle predicted moving direction to help the driver.
|
8. Parking Assistance
The feature assists the driver with the help of parking overlays to park the vehicle in target parking slot. Parallel or Vertical
Parking option can be selected by driver based on parking slot availability.
Overlays and guidelines are displayed regardless of the current vehicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking
and ensuring that there is no obstacle in the selected parking slot.
Parallel Parking
Parallel Parking guides the driver to park the vehicle in a slot parallel to the vehicle.
|
A. Selecting Parking Slot
 |
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select “Parallel Parking”
 Icon from infotainment. After selection, Infotainment displays below screen image1.
|
|
B. Setting the steering angle:
 |
Drive the vehicle Forward or Backward and ensure the greenish -blue rectangle [consider right rectangle if parking image
slot is on right side and consider left rectangle if parking slot is on left side], is placed in the parking slot. Make sure
obstacles are not present
|
Ensure, there is enough space (min.3ft) sideways between your vehicle and the parked vehicle before engaging reverse.
In the parking slot after the vertical pole.
| • | Now start turning the steering wheel towards the direction in which parking slot is present. A shorter rectangle box will appear which will change the color according to the steering position. |
 |
When the box is green(image 2), stop turning the steering wheel and hold the position.
|
Green color: Represents suitable parking location. You can try an attempt to park.
Red color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Your vehicle may hit the side of the vehicle already parked.
Blue color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Final parking space length needed will be larger than the desired length of parking
space. May lead to wrong vehicle direction movement.
Green/Blue/Red colors in this mode are for guiding the vehicle to the parking slot and it would not detect the obstacles or
alert the driver in that zone. It is the sole responsibility of the driver to ensure the rear end obstacles/ vehicles which
can lead to damage while parking.
|
C. Complete Parking
 |
With current steering position, start moving the vehicle backward. An orange arc line will appear. When the orange arc (image
3)touches the parking slot end position, stop the vehicle
|
| • | Now rotate the steering wheel to maximum in the opposite direction. Arc is then replaced by dynamic and static parking line. Continue backing the vehicle with the help of dynamic guideline. |
 |
|
Vertical/Perpendicular Parking
Vertical/Perpendicular parking assistance guides the driver to park the vehicle in a parking slot perpendicular to the vehicle.
Below are the steps to achieve Vertical parking.
|
Selecting Parking Slot
 |
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select “Vertical
|
Parking” icon present on infotainment screen. After selection, Infotainment display’s below screen:
Setting the steering angle
Based on the side driver prefers to park, either blue or pink arc needs to be taken into consideration Drive the vehicle,
either forward / backward and ensure that preferred side arc’s tip is touching the starting edge of target parking slot.
Once done, stop the vehicle.
|
|
Turn steering wheel to the maximum position, towards direction of the parking slot. Pink/ blue overlay disappears, and the
dynamic and static overlay appears on the screen as shows in the image.
|
Complete Parking
Hold steering in the maximum position and start driving the vehicle backwards. when static lines are parallel to target parking
slot, bring steering to centre position and continue driving backward until the whole vehicle is in target parking slot. Parking
Completed
6.34.2 Entry and Exit Conditions
Entry Conditions
Turn on ignition and apply the reverse gear, Infotainment will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video.
 |
You can also view vehicle’s rear surrounding, by selecting Rear View Camera option present on Infotainment Screen, irrespective
of the gear position.
|
You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment screen button, if the vehicle is in forward/drive gear and vehicle speed
exceeds 20 kmph.
Exit Conditions
| • | If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ by reverse gear option, then RVC mode exits when reverse gear is disengaged |
| • | If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to “Rear View Camera” selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen |
| • | Irrespective of RVC entry conditions, when Parallel or Vertical Parking Mode is active, driver can exit the RVC Mode using Cancel button that appears, whenever vehicle is in forward gear |
| • | RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph. |
| • | When ignition is off. |
6.34.3 Camera Maintenance
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.
| • | In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment displays ‘ Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these circumstances. |
| • | If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately. |
6.34.4 System Limitations
| • | Rear view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C) |
| • | Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully: |
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
- At night or in very dark places.
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
- If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.
| • | If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center |
| • | Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid rear view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle |
| • | The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera |
| • | Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car |
| • | The rear view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately |
| • | Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision |
| • | Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car |
| • | It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely |
| • | Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors |
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace
the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility
and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.
7 STARTING AND DRIVING II
7.1 Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS). EPS system provides an external assist, so that the driver can
easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased
ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical steering
capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially
at very low vehicle speeds and during parking manoeuvres.
Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle
serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.
Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel spokes.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF or Not availability of vehicle speed / Power cut
off), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
| • | Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s) |
| • | Uneven vehicle loading |
| • | High crown in the centre of the road |
| • | High crosswinds |
| • | Wheels out of alignment |
| • | Wheels out of balance |
| • | Loose or worn suspension components |
7.1.1 Tilt Steering
 |
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both rake and reach as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering
wheel.
|
To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:
 |
1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.
|
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.
4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.
Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while
driving.
7.2 Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped)
The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio functions.
Steering Audio Operations
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.
|
A: Mute
|
E: Source
|
|
B: Volume +
|
F: SEEK UP
|
|
C: Volume -
|
G: SEEK DOWN
|
|
D: Call Connect
|
H: Voice / Call Disconnect
|
| • | Mute - Press MUTE button to mute the audio playing in Infotainment while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode |
| • | Volume Control - Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume |
| • | Call Connect - Press to accept the incoming call to paired the BT phone to enable the driver to open the contact list in infotainment and make the call |
| • | Source - Press SOURCE button to toggle between TUNER, USB, BT AUDIO and MYDRIVE |
| • | Seek UP/Down - Press the seek UP/DOWN button can be used for toggling UP/DOWN the menu list of Infotainment. |
| • | Call Dis Connect - Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone. |
This is provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving without any distraction.
7.3 Cruise Control (if equipped)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be
used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain or in bad weather conditions.
It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection
of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.
|
|
 |
|
A
|
CRUISE ON/OFF
|
D
|
CRUISE RESUME
|
|
B
|
SET +
|
E
|
CLUSTER MENU/MODE
|
|
C
|
SET –
|
Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper
use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.
Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT for all gears except 1st and reverse
gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.
Cruise control will function only under the following conditions;
| • | The vehicle is cruising above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT |
| • | Engine RPM above 1200 RPM |
| • | Vehicle is in any gear except 1st and reverse |
| • | Clutch pedal released. |
| • | Brake pedal released. |
| • | Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button |
| • | Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + / SET - button |
| • | Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ /SET- buttons in the same ignition cycle |
Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions:
| • | CRUISE OFF button is pressed |
| • | Brake or clutch pedal depressed |
| • | If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT by accelerator pedal intervention |
| • | If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 seconds by pressing the accelerator pedal |
| • | When Set+/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 seconds (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 seconds and switch ON the ignition) |
| • | Cruise influencing error indicated by Check Engine Lamp, OBD lamp, etc. |
7.3.1 Cruise Control Activation
Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT), press and hold the SET+
button until the cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate
the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
7.3.2 Cruise Control De-activation
You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
| • | Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel |
| • | Press the brake pedal |
| • | Gear selector moved into neutral |
| • | HDC or ESP becomes active |
7.3.3 SET + Button
SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + button and release when the desired speed is reached.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + button and release when the desired speed is reached.
7.3.4 SET - Button
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about
2 kmph. When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- button. When the desired speed
is reached, release the button.
If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases
to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to toggled.
The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all
times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.
Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)
7.3.5 RESUME Button
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is
best explained with the following example:
| 1. | Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 kmph. |
| 2. | Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode either by pressing the brake pedal or by switching OFF the CRUISE control. |
| 3. | Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode. |
| 4. | When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph. |
| 5. | To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT. |
7.3.6 Override Function
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 seconds, to maintain
the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 seconds limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.
7.4 Advanced Driver Assistance System (If equipped)
The Advance Driver Assist System (ADAS) uses camera and radar to provide alerts and controls to improve the overall safety
and increase the driver comfort. It should be noted that ADAS is only an assistance given to the driver; it neither replaces
the driver nor is a substitute.
 |
The ADAS system gives enormous benefits to driver, however the driver shall remain solely responsible for the safe maneuvering
of the car. He must remain vigilant throughout the drive.
|
ADAS provides below features:
|
1
|
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
|
|
2
|
Collision mitigation System (AEB/FCW)
|
|
3
|
High Beam Assist (HBA)
|
|
4
|
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
|
|
5
|
Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
|
|
6
|
Smart Pilot Assist (SPA)
|
In view of the policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications or designs without
prior notice and without liability/obligation. Illustrations do not show the vehicle in the standard form. Please be aware
that this manual may apply to various models/variants. As a result you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle. All the information, illustration, and specifications in this manual are based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication.
We recommend you to contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for latest features applicable to your vehicle.
7.4.1 Maintenance Guidelines for Camera and Radar Sensor
 |
Camera Maintenance
To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Camera sensor failure, following points to be taken care
of.
|
| • | The outer area of the windshield must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water drops etc. |
| • | If there is condensation in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, use the de-mister to clear it. |
| • | If there is any other dirt in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, contact Mahindra Service Centre for cleaning. |
| • | Stickers, window tinting, electronic toll devices or similar objects should not be attached on the windshield in front of camera. |
| • | If the Camera needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only. |
| • | If the windshield portion in front of camera has any cracks/scratches/stone chips, it should be taken to Mahindra Service Centre for complete windshield replacement. |
| • | If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage / calibration errors in the Camera. |
| • | In case any modification to be done for Camera, beauty cover, Inside Rear View Mirror or Ceiling, contact Mahindra Service Centre. |
| • | Any external object/accessories should not be installed on the hood area as it may affect the Camera’s field of view. |
| • | Ensure that flag post on the bonnet is not blocking the camera view. |
| • | The head lamps should not be modified and in case of head lamp replacement, head lamp aiming should be by Mahindra Service Centre only |
| • | If the Windshield or Camera is replaced, the Camera must be recalibrated at Authorised Mahindra Service Centre only. |
Radar Maintenance
To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Radar sensor failure, following points to be taken care
of.
| • | The Radar surface and bumper area in front of radar must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water etc. |
| • | Any external object should not be installed on the front grill or front bumper area as it may affect Radar’s performance. |
| • | Ensure that the number plate is not blocking the radar sensor. |
| • | Avoid any kind of customization to the front bumper and Radar like attaching stickers, installing flags or metallic objects, painting etc. |
| • | If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage to the Radar unit. |
| • | If the Radar sensor needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only. |
| • | If any rework done on front bumper or Radar, the Radar must be recalibrated by Authorised Mahindra Service Center only. |
7.5 Adaptive Cruise Control (Only for Automatic Transmission variant)
When the ACC is engaged, it allows the vehicle to cruise at the desired ‘set speed’. In traffic conditions if a vehicle is
detected in the front of the vehicle, then the ACC reduces the vehicle speed to match the front preceding vehicle speed. The
distance from the front preceding vehicle is maintained as per the Distance level set by the driver.
Disclaimer
| • | ACC is an aid to assist the driver. It is not a collision avoidance system. |
| • | Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ACC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the system. |
| • | ACC is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for observing all traffic and safety rules, including maintenance of safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead |
| • | It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and to be in control of the vehicle at all times. |
| • | Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash. |
| • | ACC has limited braking capability and may not stop the vehicle in time to avoid a collision, if the front preceding vehicle decelerates quickly or a new vehicle cuts-in front always be prepared to apply brake. |
| • | Failure to follow the alerts and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury. |
| • | Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. |
| • | Use ACC in appropriate roads with proper lane marking and sign boards. |
| • | Do not use ACC in busy areas where multiple road users cross the vehicles intended path. |
| • | When two wheeler cuts out, ACC may not be able to identify the vehicle in front of two-wheeler. |
| • | ACC may not be able to stop behind stopped vehicles. |
| • | ACC may not be always able to follow two wheeler. |
ACC may not detect all types of vehicle and driver has to be vigilant to be in control of the vehicle.
7.5.1 ACC Switches
 |
The ACC switches on the steering wheel consists of five switches which are used for ACC Operation.
|
A - CRUISE ON/OFF Switch
| • | To Toggle between ACC ON and OFF |
B - SET+
| • | To set desired speed |
| • | To increase Set speed when ACC is active |
C - TIME GAP
| • | To select the time gap to the front preceding vehicle between Level 4 to Level 1. |
D - SET-
| • | To set desired speed |
| • | To decrease Set speed when ACC is active |
E - RESUME
| • | To resume ACC to previous Set Speed. |
Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET-
7.5.2 Instrument Cluster Display
|
Image |
Display |
|---|---|
|
|
ACC Indicator
|
 |
Set Speed
|
 |
Time Gap
|
 |
front preceding vehicle Indicator
|
front preceding vehicle Indicator shows an icon of a Car always though the front preceding vehicle may be a car/truck/two
wheeler or any other type of vehicle.
7.5.3 How to turn ACC ON/OFF
 |
Press CRUISE switch to activate ACC feature. This turns ACC to Standby Mode.
|
Standby Mode
When CRUISE switch is pressed and desired speed by using SET +/– is not set.
During Standby mode
ACC indicator will illuminate in white color.
 |
|
|
|
|
| • | The vehicle will not maintain previous set speed or previous time gap to the vehicle ahead. |
| • | Press the ON/OFF switch again to deactivate ACC feature. |
| • | If ACC indicator illuminates in red , there could be a problem with ACC system. visit nearby mahindra service center. |
Pressing the ON/OFF switch when ACC in Standby/Active will deactivate the ACC feature.
|
How to set Desired Speed
|
||||
 |
Drive the vehicle to the desired speed (minimum 10 kmph) and Press Set+/Set- switch
|
|||
 |
|
|||
| • | ACC will maintain the vehicle speed as set by the driver. Once set, it will be confirmed by the ACC telltale light. After that no accelerator pedal input from driver need to be given. |
ACC indicator will be displayed in green.
| • | Set speed will be displayed as set by driver. |
| • | Time interval bars will be displayed. |
ACC will have two modes
1. Speed Control Mode
During Speed Control Mode, time gap indicator will be displayed
ACC operation When No Front Preceding vehicle detected ahead
When there is no front preceding vehicle detected ahead, ACC maintains the speed set by the driver.
2. Follow Control Mode
During Follow Mode, front preceding vehicle Indicator will be displayed if a front preceding vehicle is detected.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle detected ahead
When there is a preceding vehicle, ACC tries to maintain a safe gap to the front preceding vehicle by reducing the speed accordingly
within comfortable deceleration limits.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle moved out from its lane
When the front preceding vehicle has moved out from your lane of travel, ACC accelerates and maintains vehicle speed to the
set speed.
Whenever driver steers and system finds a new target ie., front preceding vehicle. ACC takes time to pick the new target and
react.
| • | If Set+/Set- switch is pressed when vehicle speed is below 30 kmph then ACC Set Speed will be initialized to 30 kmph. |
| • | When there is a front preceding vehicle, user can set desired speed by pressing SET+/- switch below 30 kmph as there is no minimum desired speed requirement |
| • | When front preceding vehicle and your vehicle are in stopped condition , apply brake and press SET+/SET-. Note that ACC will remain in standstill until the front preceding vehicle moves. |
When the SET +/SET– switch is pressed under the following conditions, ACC cannot be activated. Visual and audio alert will
be provided to driver to inform the same.
|
Condition |
Alert |
|---|---|
|
When traveling below 10 kmph and a vehicle ahead is not Detected
|
 |
|
When front preceding vehicle is very close or far away from host vehicle.
When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) Position
When the brakes are operated by the driver
|
 |
|
When braking system unavailable.
|
 |
|
When driving above maximum ACC operational speed limit.
|
 |
|
When driver door is open.
|
 |
|
When Collision Mitigation System is unavailable.
|
 |
|
When driver seat belt is not buckled.
|
 |
|
ACC interacts with other systems, such as braking, steering, EMS (Engine Management System), ACC Switch etc. If any of these
systems are not functioning properly, ACC cannot be activated.
|
|
How to increase Set Speed
Use one of the following methods to increase set speed:
| • | Press and quickly release the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 1 kmph |
| • | Press and hold the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 10 kmph. The set speed will be increased to the next nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/- button for 60 sec will turn OFF ACC. |
| • | Release the switch when the desired set speed reached. |
How to decrease Set Speed
Use one of the following methods to decrease set speed:
| • | Press and quickly release the SET- switch to decrease the set speed by 1 kmph |
| • | Press and hold the SET- switch to decrease the set speed.by 10 kmph. The set speed will be decreased to the next nearest multiple of 10 |
| • | Release the switch when the desired set speed reached. |
How to resume ACC to last set speed value
Press the RESUME switch
– ACC will resume back to the last set speed provided the conditions to engage ACC are satisfied.
How to change the Time Gap Level to the front preceding vehicle
Each time the Time gap switch C is pressed, the time gap will keep rolling between the time gap levels as per the below sequence
Time Gap Level 4->Time Gap Level 3 -> Time Gap Level 2->
Time Gap Level 1-> Time Gap Level 4
| • | The set time gap value of the current ignition/driving cycle will be used for the next ignition/driving cycle. |
| • | When the system is used for the first time after starting the engine, the time gap value is set to the maximum value (Level 4). |
ACC STOP & GO (Only for EPB Variants)
ACC operation When front preceding vehicle is detected in models equipped with Electronic Park Brake
When a front preceding vehicle is detected, front preceding vehicle indicator along with time interval bars will be displayed
in cluster
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, if the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC
decelerates to bring your vehicle also to stop within the limitations of the system. Your vehicle movement will resume automatically
if the front preceding vehicle is not stopped for more than approx. 3 seconds.
 |
If it takes more than 3 seconds for the front preceding vehicle to begin moving again, ACC will be set to Standby and the
stop-hold function will activate. A pop-up alert message “Press Resume Switch or Pedal to Accelerate” will be displayed
for driver to resume.
|
ACC can be engaged by any of the following methods when in stop-hold mode if front preceding vehicle is present at distance
more than 2m and less than 40m:
| 1. | Press RESUME button |
| 2. | Slightly tap the accelerator pedal |
| 3. | Increase the speed above 10 kmph and press the RESUME button |
When in ACC stopped condition, if driver is trying to unbuckle seat belt/open doors/ change gear etc, then ACC may get disengaged
and based on gear lever position, vehicle may crawl. Driver has to apply brake and control the vehicle.
ACC without Stop & Go
For vehicles with manual parking brake, ACC without STOP & GO is applicable. Here, If the front preceding vehicle comes to
stop, ACC decelerates to bring the vehicle speed up to 20 kmph and disengages. System provides pop up message “Adaptive Cruise
Control Standby” for driver to take necessary action.
ACC decelerates when there is too much of lateral acceleration.
 |
When following the front preceding vehicle, if the front preceding vehicle disappears due to a cut-out maneuver, a pop-up
message will be displayed as “Object Disappeared Pay Attention”
|
Please pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
If ACC changes targets from a moving front preceding vehicle to a stationary front preceding vehicle at speeds above 30 km/h,
the system may not react to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively
apply the brake to slow/stop the vehicle.
ACC operation when Accelerator pedal is pressed
Even when ACC is engaged, driver can press the accelerator pedal if he wishes to accelerate the vehicle rapidly. When driver
presses accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed.
| • | ACC is overridden hence Set Speed and Distance is not followed |
 |
|
| • | Set speed display will blink. |
| • | Set distance display will blink. |
| • | The front preceding vehicle indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. |
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will exit from the override mode and ACC operation will be resumed
Automatic cancellation of ACC
Under the following conditions ACC control will be cancelled automatically with an audio alert.
| • | When the shift lever is not in D(Drive) position. |
| • | When the parking brake is applied |
| • | When Brake pedal is pressed. |
| • | When ESP is turned off |
| • | When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted. |
| • | When radar sensor area of the front bumper covered with dirt or is obstructed. |
| • | When accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 60 seconds continuously. |
| • | When collision mitigation system is in action. |
| • | When ESP operates |
| • | When driver door is open |
| • | When vehicle speed exceeds maximum ACC operating speed. |
| • | When driver seat belt is unbuckled |
| • | When the Zoom mode is selected. |
| • | The engine speed (rpm) is too high/low. |
| • | When ACC is engaged, and your vehicle stopped, and after 3 seconds the front preceding vehicle moves and disappears and when the driver tries to resume ACC without the front preceding vehicle. |
| • | When driver tries to resume ACC when front preceding vehicle (moving/stopped) is not in detection range. |
 |
In above scenarios, the driver may be alerted by an audio alert and a message in the instrument cluster that ACC function
is released/disengaged.
|
The driver is responsible for adapting to vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead.
ACC disengages whenever there is an ESP intervention. For example-: pot holes on a bumpy road
 |
In some situations where ACC braking is not enough to follow the front preceding vehicle, an audio alert along with pop-up
message will be given in the instrument cluster "Collision Possible Apply Brake".
|
|
The driver has to apply brake to keep a safe distance.
|
|
 |
In case of temporary abnormal conditions, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in Yellow color and ACC function will be disabled
temporarily by showing up a pop-up
|
|
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled due to Radar Limitation”
|
|
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions
|
Causes |
Action |
|---|---|
|
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice.
|
Clean/Clear the bumper in front of the radar.
|
|
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
|
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
Do not use ACC during heavy rain or snow.
|
|
Clogged water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.
|
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
Do not use ACC during these situations.
|
|
The bumper area in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
|
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
|
 |
In case of permanent failure, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in red color also and ACC function will be disabled permanently
by showing up a pop-up
|
|
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled Service Required” Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
In case of collision in front bumper, the radar position may change which results in degraded ACC performance. Visit nearest
service center for radar calibration.
|
|
7.5.4 ACC System Limitations
| • | Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. |
| • | Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect front preceding vehicle. |
| • | ACC may not assist in close cut-in scenarios. |
| • | Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects. |
| • | In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, turn off ACC and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible. |
| • | ACC will be disabled when trailer is connected |
When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.
Avoid using ACC under the following conditions
| • | On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves |
| • | On slippery road surfaces |
| • | During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) and poor visibility. |
| • | When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the sensor |
| • | On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set speed and in trying to maintain set speed, may result in overheating the brakes) |
| • | On repeated uphill and downhill roads |
| • | When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration |
| • | Interference by other radar sources installed in nearby protected areas like military, airports etc. |
| • | Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on or off ramps. |
ACC Limitation Scenarios
ACC may not function in below scenarios
| • | Close cut-in situation |
Sudden entry of other road vehicle in to host vehicle's lane may not be detected.
| • | Situation of stopped vehicles |
Sudden vicinity of stationary object in host vehicle's lane may not be detected.
When the preceding vehicle that follows is cutting out, it detects the preceding vehicle (Vehicle-B) as a new preceding vehicle
because of an irregular radar reflection are occurred in particular.
As Vehicle-B stops, the host vehicle stops on Vehicle-B.
At this time, since there is no collision with Vehicle-A, the driver may misunderstand that it is under normal control of
Vehicle-A.
When Vehicle-B starts, host vehicle may start without considering the new stationary Vehicle-A because of irregular radar
reflection.
| • | Curve entry / exit situation |
In the curve entry / exit situation, based on the curvature of road on which the host vehicle is moving differs from the curvature
of the predicted road, so the adjacent lane can be selected as the control target and the preceding vehicle in the host lane
may be missed
| • | Curves with larger curvature |
If the radius of curvature is very small, an inadequate or excessive acceleration/ deceleration may occur due to the limitation
| • | Poor visibility |
In case of poor visibility, Driver must take the control of vehicle
| • | When a preceding vehicle enters an intersection |
In an road intersection, target preceding vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control
of vehicle.
| • | When the road gradient changes |
In case of road gradient variation, preceding target vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must
take the control of vehicle.
| • | Sensor cover blockage |
Any blockage to sensors, detection will degrade and ADAS features may not function as intended
| • | Long cargo loading vehicle |
If the height of the preceding target vehicle is very high, the sensor may not detect it and ADAS functionality may vary.
Driver should take control of vehicle.
| • | Inability to recognize pedestrians |
In case of Stop & Go situation, the host vehicle may not detect pedestrian. Driver should take control of vehicle.
| • | Excessive braking of the preceding vehicle |
ACC might not slow down your XUV700 sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total
brake force available in vehicle
If the preceding vehicle brakes beyond the ACC maximum deceleration limit, AEB may engage. However, driver shall be alert
and take control vehicle.
| • | Detection performance deterioration due to road side structures |
If the front radar is exposed to the surrounding road structures (steel laminates, tunnels, construction sections, etc.) that
may affect the detection performance, the front preceding vehicle may not be detected normally.
Any metal road structures / bridges, tunnels or toll plazas may vary the system functionality, Driver shall be alert and take
control of the vehicle.
| • | False deceleration or no deceleration |
If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, ACC may produce frequent false deceleration or no deceleration for front
preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment
| • | ACC does not slowdown for pot-holes and Speed breakers |
| • | ACC may not slow down for road curves |
| • | ACC may not slow down for barriers/blockades |
| • | ACC does not slow down for crossing or merging vehicles at angles more than 30 degree |
ACC might not slow down your XUV700 sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total
brakeforce available in vehicle
| • | ACC does not slowdown for oncoming/reversing front vehicles |
| • | ACC does not slowdown for animals |
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to special/modified vehicles such as Harvester, Tractor Trailor, Motorized Ice Cream
Cart, construction vehicle, animals etc.
| • | ACC may not reliably follow bicycle |
| • | ACC cannot react to stationary target |
| • | If a very slow moving target cutting in between your XUV700 and stationary target then there is a chance that ACC system does not pick-up the slow moving target since ACC is not able to discriminate between slow moving target and stationary target. |
| • | If a target in front takes a sharp turn and goes out of Field of view, then your XUV700 can start to accelerate fast. |
| • | ACC might not pick-up target at sharp curve |
| • | When XUV700 follows two wheeler and two wheeler overtakes stationary target ahead, XUV700 may not slow down due to stationary target detection limitation. |
| • | ACC cannot follow a motorized two-wheeler if two-wheeler speed is less than around 10kmph. |
| • | Do not use ACC with an offset to the target vehicle. |
| • | Do not use ACC to follow motorbikes where there is no space for XUV700 to navigate. |
7.6 Collision Mitigation System
Collision Mitigation System alerts the driver by providing audio and visual warning when there is a possibility of collision
with rear end of the preceding vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians detected ahead. if driver fails to take actions within a
rational time, system will apply braking in certain situations to mitigate the collision.
Disclaimer
| • | System can detect vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians but not in all situations. System's capacity to assess certain traffic situations is a supplemental aid to the driver and does not function in all driving/traffic situations or weather/road conditions. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Refer system limitation section for more information about system limitation. Read the manual carefully in detail before using the system. |
| • | Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the system could result in serious injury or death. |
| • | The Collision Mitigation System is a supplemental aid to the driver . It is not a replacement for the driver. It is driver's responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and drive the vehicle safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques. |
| • | System does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. |
| • | System does not detect all kind of vehicles ,bicyclists and pedestrians. |
| • | System is designed to intervene as late as possible i.e. in emergency to help avoid unnecessary activation. |
| • | Vehicles, Pedestrians or cyclists at an offset may not be detected by FCW/AEB system. |
| • | Collision Mitigation System works on prediction of possible collision with the objects in front of vehicle by assuming the objects movements in certain directions. Sometimes the objects movement direction may not match to the prediction and the system may react early and provide warning or perform braking even though the object may not be in the host vehicle path. |
| • | Only rear end of the preceding vehicles are identified by the system and warning or braking as needed will be provided by the system. System may not react or providing warning or braking for a crossing or oncoming vehicle. System may not react to a stationary vehicle if the vehicle is stationed in crossing or oncoming pose. |
Collision Mitigation System comprises of the following functions:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW): When enabled, alerts the driver in case of a possible collision detected by the system.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB): When enabled, can provide a braking assist to mitigate the collision detected by the system.
There are situations where the system may not detect a possible collision, driver has to take control of the vehicle always.
System Operation
Prerequisite for activation
AEB or FCW gets ready to be activated when turned ON from Instrument Cluster settings and when the following prerequisites
are satisfied
- The braking system is ready.
- Vehicle speed is within system operating limit
- No other system failures or degradation of functions related to Collision mitigation systems like Braking system, Engine
management system, Steering system etc.
AEB/FCW for Vehicles
To enable the system to detect rear end of preceding vehicles ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph
Below 10kmph FCW/AEB will not work.
System detects types of vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. In order to
detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights must be ON and clearly visible.
Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a front preceding vehicle. Minimum overlap with the bumper
should be 50% for system to detect a motorbike/two wheeler
Level 1 Warning
 |
|
The icon displayed as visual alert may show the object in the front as car even though the system may react for cars, pedestrians,two
wheelers and cyclists.
Level 2 Warning
 |
|
Level 3 Warning
 |
|
System applying AEB braking can only mitigate a possible collision and does not guarantee in avoiding the collision. Driver
has to take necessary braking or steering actions to avoid the collision.
During harder braking, there are possibilities that the occupants may experience a high amount of physical shock due to the
braking force which may cause uncomfortable feeling or injury. Take necessary health checkups and precautions when experienced.
All the occupants should wear seat belts, as the system braking may lead of high level of motional inertia, where unbelted
occupants are in a risk of getting injured.
Vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system.
If driver applies hard brake during drive , dynamic braking system activates to boost braking force.
When Forward Collision Warning is selected in Instrument cluster settings, the driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent
collision by visual and audible warnings. Braking will not be provided in this setting.
 |
When system has applied the brakes, a pop-up message will be displayed as "Automatic Emergency Braking Completed".
|
If AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes
are released.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 85 kmph, AEB third level warning won’t come and system won’t apply full braking. In
this case first and second level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or Collision Mitigation System to
take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at
70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to take control of the
vehicle always.
AEB/FCW for Pedestrain
To enable the system to detect a pedestrian, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
For pedestrian detection clear information about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the
body and a person's normal pattern of movement are required. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a contrast to
the background. If there is little contrast, the person may not be detected.
If major parts of the pedestrian's body are not visible to the camera, person may not be detected.
In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire body and the person must be at least
80 cm tall.
Fast moving pedestrians and pedestrians not in their walking pose are not detected by the system and hence there will not
be any warning or braking provided by the system.
Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to detect a pedestrian.
System may not detect pedestrians in sitting, bent, crawling or lying poses.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for pedestrian. Hence system
won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone
will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at
70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in control of the
vehicle always.
AEB/FCW for Cyclists
To enable the system to detect a cyclist, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
For cyclist detection, clear information about the cycle itself and the rider's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and
lower parts of the body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement is required
If major parts of the cyclist's body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist.
The cyclist should be of height greater than 3 feet and should be driving an adult cycle.
Fast moving cyclists are not detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for the
fast moving cyclists.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for cyclist. Hence system won’t
apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be
provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at
70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in control of the
vehicle always.
AEB for Vehicles - Junction Turning
To enable the system to detect an approaching vehicle in junction turning scenarios the vehicle driving speed must be between
10-30 kmph and oncoming vehicle should be clearly visible and moving in the speed range of 30 kmph to 70 kmph.
To detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that approaching vehicle must be within
detection range and your vehicle must be in left lane making a right turn with the right turn indicator ON.
In junction turning scenarios, system applies braking and there is no warning.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the target ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help
mitigate the consequences of a collision and cannot completely avoid the collision. The driver is responsible for maintaining
a safe distance and speed. Never wait for a warning or collision mitigation system to take action.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
| • | When steering is applied to avoid a collision |
| • | When the accelerator pedal is depressed |
| • | When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead. |
| • | When driver presses and releases brake pedal. |
How to turn ON/OFF AEB/FCW System
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB/FCW system ON or OFF:
| 1. | Press the button until “Settings” displays in the instrument cluster display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. |
| 2. | Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and press the OK button.
|
 |
 |
Warning Level settings
 |
The driver can select the level 1 warning activation time in the instrument cluster settings for driver assistance.
|
The options for the level 1 Warning include the following:
Late - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at shorter time to collision.
Normal - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Late" setting.
Early - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Normal" setting. if you are experiencing
frequent warning, you can change setting to "Normal" or "Late"
There is a minimum time interval of 60 seconds required for system to provide successive AEB.
There is a chance for providing FCW warnings for some obstacles like Barricades and Cows since the RADAR may not be able to
differentiate such big obstacles with respect to vehicles.
| • | No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. |
| • | Never test Collision Mitigation System by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death. |
| • | To help make Collision Mitigation System as effective as possible, it is recommended to always use the setting "Early" |
Collision Mitigation System Troubleshooting
If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the instrument cluster means that the system is not functioning properly
and should be turned off.
However, message will not be displayed in all situations in which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason,
the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the camera and area on the bumper in front of radar sensor
is always kept clean.
1. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to camera sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop
up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Function Limited due to Camera Blockage" .
 |
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:
|
|
Cause |
Action |
|---|---|
|
The area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow
|
Clean the windshield or remove the ice/snow
|
|
Thick fog or heavy rain /snow blocks reduce the camera sensor’s range of visibility
|
No action. The driver should be extra alert in condition of this type.
|
|
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera sensor.
|
Have the area of the windshield cleaned by Mahindra Authorised service.
|
| • | If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this service. |
2. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to radar sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop
up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled due to Radar Detection Limitation".
 |
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:
|
|
Cause |
Action |
|
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice
|
Clean/clear the bumper in front of the radar.
|
|
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
|
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
|
|
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.
|
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
|
|
The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
|
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
|
If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this service.
3. If system malfunctions, AEB warning lamp will be continuously ON in yellow color.
 |
A pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled: Service required". Contact
an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
|
7.6.1 Collision Mitigation System Limitations
Collision Mitigation System is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in
the following situations:
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
| • | Collision mitigation system cannot detect all vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians under all conditions. |
| • | System can not detect the following objects:
|
| • | If the pedestrians has limited contrast to their immediate background, warning or braking may be delayed or not come at all. |
| • | System may not react for fast moving pedestrians. |
| • | System cannot detect all cyclists in all situations, such as:
|
| • | System may not function in junction turning scenario under below conditions:
|
| • | System may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too small or too high |
| • | System may not function properly or detect a target ahead in the following conditions:
|
| • | In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, disable AEB and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible. |
| • | AEB will be disabled when trailer is connected |
When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.
Collision Mitigation System limitation Scenarios
Collision Mitigation System may not function in below scenarios
| • | False decelerations or no decelerations If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, Collision mitigation system may produce frequent false warning or deceleration
or no warning/ no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment.
|
| • | When any vehicle moves greater than +/- 20 deg. to host vehicle direction |
If any vehicle moves at heading angle greater than +/- 20 deg. to the host vehicle system may not consider it. Driver must
be alert and take control.
| • | When it is difficult to obtain view by the camera |
Due to poor visibility by camera like sunlight or any other source of light on camera. System may not function as intended
Driver must be alert and take control of the vehicle
| • | When the tail light of the front preceding vehicle is asymmetrical at night |
At night, if the preceding vehicle's tail lamps are not in symmetry or mounting positions are unusual, system may not function
as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.
| • | Pedestrian suddenly jumping in to the host vehicle lane too closer to host vehicle |
System may not consider if a pedestrian suddenly jumps in to the lane / area very closer to host vehicle. Driver shall be
alert and take control of vehicle
| • | If a part of the body of the pedestrian is a covered or standing pedestrian |
In the case of pedestrians whose body part is obscured by umbrellas, bags, special clothes, etc., detection may not be accurate
& system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle
| • | Difficult to distinguish pedestrians due to low illumination. |
If the illumination is low / poor visibility, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control
of vehicle.
| • | Fast moving pedestrians |
System may not function as intended with fast moving pedestrians due to sensing limitations.
| • | Pedestrians with lower height |
System may not function as intended with pedestrians with lower height
| • | Risk of collision in proximity cut-in |
There is a close-sensing blind spot, and there is a risk of collision at close cut-in of adjacent lane vehicles.
| • | Intersection situation |
The control target of the radar is selected as the control target only for the rear surface of the vehicle driving in the
AEB vehicle driving direction. Therefore, there is a risk of collision for vehicles moving at right angles to the direction
of intersection or for vehicles turning right.
| • | The condition is that target is not detected at the road inclination change point |
Due to the vertical angle limit of the radar, it is impossible to detect the front target (vehicle, pedestrian) in uphill
and downhill hill.
| • | The situation where the load is protruding from the rear of the vehicle |
When a specific type of load is loaded or a special vehicle, it can collide if it is not selected as the control target due
to the sensor detection limit
| • | When target can not be detected due to sensor contamination |
In case of Sensor (Radar, Camera) contamination, blockage can occur and collision of the front preceding vehicle and pedestrians
is possible
| • | When driving on a large curve road |
When driving on a large curve road, due to the sensor limit, the front preceding vehicle and the pedestrian can collide.
| • | When it is impossible to obtain the driver's field of vision |
If the driver uses the AEB in the unconfined (snow, rain, fog, etc.), the sensor limit may cause a collision between the vehicle
and pedestrians ahead.
| • | Detection problems due to complicated structures around roads |
If a construction section, railroad track, or other metallic object is on the road (eg, tollgate, subway construction site,
tunnel, lane-proximity guard rail, etc.) AEB/FCW will not work.
| • | Collision Mitigation System does not react for pot-holes |
| • | Collision Mitigation System does not function for Speed Breakers |
| • | Collision Mitigation System does not function for barricades/cone/barrels |
| • | Collision Mitigation System does not function for oncoming vehicles |
| • | Collision Mitigation System does not function for animals |
7.7 High Beam Assist
High beam assist function is intended to reduce the glare produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the drivers of
oncoming vehicles to maneuver safely .
High beam assist feature automatically turns high beam ON or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light source
of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the surrounding light conditions
High beam assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights through
manual ON/OFF depending on visibility requirements.
How to Turn ON/OFF HBA System
HBA Activation
Select High Beam Assist function from Driver assistance menu
|
|
 |
 |
 |
Turn Steering Column Head lamp Switch to 'AUTO' position
HBA will activate when following conditions are met:
| • | High beam Assist is selected through driver assistance menu |
| • | Auto light switch is turned ON in the Combination Switch |
| • | Night condition is detected and Low beam is already turned ON through the Light Sensor |
| • | High beam switch is turned ON |
| • | Vehicle speed is above 20 kmph |
When HBA feature is activated, HBA lamp will be ON.
Once HBA is activated, HBA feature will turn OFF High Beam when any of the light sources from oncoming / Preceding vehicle
or streetlights is detected in front of vehicle.
HBA feature will turn ON High Beam when:
| • | HBA function is activated as per above conditions. |
| • | No light source is detected by the camera from Oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources (depends on intensity) for few seconds. |
If high beam was turned OFF due to street lights, then high beam will be turned ON once streetlight area is completely crossed
If system malfunctions , a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster as "High Beam Assist Unavailable". It is recommended
that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
7.7.1 HBA System Limitations
HBA is subject to certain system limitations and may keep High beam OFF for certain limitations and ON for few other limitation
conditions.
| • | When the light from the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc. |
| • | When headlights or taillights are with non-standard color or Illuminance level or shape. |
| • | When the lamp of the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is covered with dust, mud, snow or water. |
| • | When visibility is poor due to fog, heavy rain or snow. |
| • | When head lamp aiming is not properly adjusted. |
| • | When driving on a narrow-curved road or rough road. |
| • | When driving downhill or uphill. |
| • | When vehicle is near bright street tower lamps, reflecting sign or mirror, flashing sign lamps. |
| • | When the vehicle is tilted may be due to a flat tyre or being towed. |
| • | When the light from bicycle is weak or located in long distance. |
| • | When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicle is very small or weak or located in low or too high position. |
| • | When windshield is dirty or if any object blocks the Camera sensor. |
| • | When vehicle is in Construction area due to temporarily installed reflectors. |
| • | When vehicle is near traffic lights, signboards of buildings, lightning rods of construction sections, center line separation rods (reflection type), traffic signs (including variable speed LEDs), vehicle lights reflected on building glass or road reflectors. |
7.8 Traffic Sign Recognition
Traffic Sign Recognition feature assists the driver by displaying Speed limits signs in the instrument cluster display.
TSR system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor . The driver is always responsible for operating the
vehicle as per the road regulations.
Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera's visual field.
How to Turn ON/OFF TSR System
Select Traffic Sign Recognition Function from Driver Assistance menu in the cluster
|
|
|
 |
Traffic sign display in Instrument Cluster
Speed: limit Signs
 |
When the system recognises a speed limit sign, it displays on Instrument Cluster
|
 |
After a pre-defined time, road sign display is Grayed out to indicate to driver that the sign is of past value.
|
If End of Speed Limit sign is detected, the icon in the cluster gets updated as shown in the image.
If no new Speed Limit Sign detected for some time, the icon changes to 'No Recognition’ as shown in the image.
Over Take Not Allowed Sign
When the system recognizes an overtaking not allowed sign, it is displayed on Instrument Cluster
 |
If system malfunctions, a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Traffic Sign Recog. Unavailable". It is
recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
|
7.8.1 Traffic Sign Recognition System Limitations
The Traffic Sign Recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in
the following situations:
| • | The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve. |
| • | The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e being turned over, blocked by an object, or damaged). |
| • | Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign. |
| • | The LED light of the traffic sign is broken. |
| • | The visibility is poor due to heavy rain, snow, fog or poor light around the sign. |
| • | The traffic sign do not conform to the standards. |
| • | The traffic sign cannot be distinguished due to shadow caused by overpass or trees. |
| • | There is bright light around the traffic sign. |
| • | The vehicle speed is too low or too high. |
| • | There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windshield, where the camera is installed. |
| • | The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker, paper, or fallen leaf. |
| • | Host vehicle driven right after preceding vehicle. |
| • | The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached, passes by your vehicle. |
| • | TSR function may not detect electronic sign board. |
| • | TSR function may not detect conditional sign board. |
| • | TSR function may not detect rectangular sign boards. |
7.9 Lane Keep Assist System
The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system provides corrective steering to prevent the vehicle from departing the lane if the system
judges that the departure is unintentional from driver's side.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides visual, audio and haptic alerts to the driver once the system detects that
the vehicle is crossing the lane boundary unintentionally which is determined based on whether the turn signal towards the
direction of departure is turned ON or not.
The driver can choose to have either Warning Only or both Warning + Assist feature.
It is important to know that the Lane keep Assist system shall work only if the lane markings on the road are clearly visible.
The Lane Keep Assist function is meant to provide assist to the driver and cannot take full control of the steering system.
It is driver’s responsibility to stay alert and be in control of the vehicle throughout the drive.
How to Turn ON /OFF Lane Keep Assist System
Go to Driver Assistance menu under Settings
Select Warning + Assist to enable both Lane Keep Assist as well as Lane Departure Warning
Select Warning Only to enable Lane Departure Warning alone.
 |
 |
System Operation
When the system can detect the lanes, the lane marking in instrument cluster will be in white.
 |
When system cannot detect lanes or if system is unavailable due to speed being less than 60 kmph, the marker lines will be
grayed out.
|
LDW Operation in "Warning Only" mode
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed or road conditions are not satisfied, LDW feature will be in STANDBY mode
and LDW indicator light will illuminate in white.
If any of the lane markers are detected and vehicle speed is above 60kmph and all the other road parameter values are satisfied,
LDW feature is ready for operation and LDW indicator light will illuminate in green.
When vehicle approaches either the left or the right lane boundary, the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink and
lane marking color of respective side will change to orange. Haptic and audio alert will also be provided to warn the driver
about lane departure.
The warning will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle returns back to original lane.
Lane Departure Warning will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn signal or hazard
switch is turned ON
Lane departure warning shall be resumed in approximately 4 seconds after turning OFF the turn signal.
Lane Departure Warning may be provided for road edges or road marks which looks like lane boundaries.
The maximum warning time is limited to 2.2 sec. To provide re-warning, vehicle should have been out of warning region atleast
once. i.e. Vehicle has to be in or near to center of the lane.
LKA Operation in "Warning + Assist" mode
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed /road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, LKA feature will be in
STANDBY mode and LKA indicator light will illuminate in white.
If both lane markers are detected, vehicle speed is above 60 kmph and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions
are satisfied, LKA system is ready to provide assist and LKA indicator light will illuminate in green.
When the system detects an unintentional departure of the vehicle from its lane, a slight counter steering torque is provided
to prevent the departure and the driver is notified by blinking the LKA indicator on the instrument panel in green color.
Also visual and audible alerts are provided if vehicle is about to cross the lane boundary.
The warning and assist will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle is returned back
to original lane
When LKA system provides steering assist, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.
Lane Keep Assist will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn indicator signal or hazard
switch is turned ON.
Lane Keep Assist shall be resumed again only once vehicle has returned back to lane and 4 seconds is completed after turning
OFF the turn indicator signal.
LKA may be provided for road markings if those are looking like lane boundaries. LKA may be provided for road edges/vertical
road edges (cones/curbs/medians/guard rails) if the system detects them accurately, but not always guaranteed.
LKA will not be provided if the vehicle approaches the lane boundary with a higher heading angle.
LKA won’t be provided in the types of roads if road edge/vertical road edge is present on one side and neither road edge/vertical
road edge nor lane marking is present on the other side.
The audible alert can be disabled through settings in the cluster if the driver wishes to do so.
LKA and LDW shall be activated above 60 kmph and gets deactivated below 55 kmph.
If the vehicle dynamics conditions are not safe for the operation of LKA, then LKA may not be provided at all or may get cancelled
if it is already being provided.
Similarly when Left turn /Right turn/Hazard is activated LKA will not be provided or will be cancelled if already being provided.
The Lane Keep Assist torque will be adjusted according to the driver applied torque to reduce discomfort and to provide precedence
to driver control.
If the driver intentionally tries to cross the lane boundary by applying more torque, then assist will be cancelled. In such
conditions warning alone will be provided once the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
If the driver is constantly holding the steering wheel very lightly while the LKA intervention is being provided, system may
assume that the driver is not attentive enough and will provide visual alert to the driver as in image below:
 |
If the driver continues to hold the steering wheel lightly for a next intervention occurring within 3 minutes, then in addition
to the visual alert, audio alert will also be provided until the system makes sure that driver is in full control.
|
If lane marking is suddenly not available or if lane widens suddenly , then for a short duration virtual lanes may get created
and assist/warning may be provided once the vehicle approaches/crosses the virtual lane boundary .
The preference for steering control and alerts will be given to Smart Pilot Assist over Lane Keep Assist if Smart Pilot Assist
is equipped and enabled by driver. Please go through Smart Pilot chapter for more details.
| • | Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle. |
| • | In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure. |
| • | System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane. |
LKA/LDW will not be provided for barricades and barrels on the side of road.
 |
If system malfunctions in Warning Only mode, LDW indicator light will illuminate in Amber color and a pop up message will
appear in Instrument Cluster that "Lane Departure Warning Unavailable".
|
|
It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
|
|
 |
If system malfunctions in Warning + Assist mode ,LKA indicator light will illuminate in Amber color and a pop up message
will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Lane Keep Assist Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer
in this case.
|
LKA may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane
even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should
always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override LKA in such situations.
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by LKA system may
not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering
always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.
7.9.1 Lane Keep Assist System Limitations
LKA and LDW System is intended to assist the driver and cannot function as intended in all kinds of driving, weather, traffic
and road conditions as mentioned below.
| • | Road under construction |
| • | Reduced visibility due to bad weather on account of rain, fog, snow etc |
| • | Roads with indistinct/faded lane markings |
| • | Road sections with sharp curves |
| • | Narrow roads |
| • | High speed driving especially in sharp curves |
| • | Road sections where there are turn lanes or when the original lane merges or separates |
| • | Passing through tunnels when brightness changes suddenly. |
| • | Horizontal or vertical slope |
| • | Preceding vehicle obstructing lane visibility |
| • | Improper headlight aiming/headlight covered with dirt |
| • | Any other environmental conditions affecting camera vision |
| • | Poor visibility due to sun glare or blockage in lens |
| • | Lane Keep assist function will be disabled when the trailer is attached. |
| • | Lane Keep assist functions will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind. |
| • | Lane Keep assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white and yellow. |
In such situations, it may be advisable to turn the function OFF or driver shall take complete control of vehicle.
7.10 Smart Pilot Assist System
Smart Pilot Assist system is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane's side marker lines
by providing steering assist as well as maintaining a set time interval.
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.
| • | Smart Pilot Assist System is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities. |
| • | Smart Pilot Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive of driver. |
| • | Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. |
| • | Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations. |
| • | Smart Pilot Assist must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system. |
How to activate Smart Pilot Assist
Select "Smart Pilot Assist" from "Driver Assistance" option in Instrument Cluster screen -> under Instrument Cluster Settings.
 |
 |
Smart pilot assist will be active only if ACC is active
System Operation
Smart Pilot Assist system is combination of Adaptive Cruise Control and Lane Centering.
If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Smart Pilot Assist will be in STANDBY mode and Smart Pilot Assist
indicator light will illuminate in white.
If both lane markers are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs
lane centering and indicator light will illuminate in green.
When system performs lane centering, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.
If system was assisting and transiting to Standby due to any reasons, then Smart Pilot Assist will stop providing assist and
indicator light will blink in white for few seconds
If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead during lane centering, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front as per the set time gap.
When lane markings are not available, system will follow set speed and set time gap as set by the driver for ACC.
Always use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. A short time interval gives the driver limited
reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. System will be deactivated/off when ACC system is turned off or
Smart Pilot Assist is deselected from the settings or when 3rd stage hands-off warning displays.
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart Pilot Assist also gets into standby.
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart Pilot Assist also gets into standby.
If lane centering was active and road is straight, Smart Pilot Assist may be provided for some more time even though lane
markings are not available.
Smart Pilot Assist may follow preceding vehicle if lanes are not detected properly and following conditions are satisfied.
| • | Lane centering was active before lane detection got dropped. |
| • | Preceding vehicle speed is less than around 75 kmph |
| • | Preceding vehicle is close enough for system to follow. Smart Pilot Assist may stop to follow preceding vehicle if above conditions are not satisfied or if the preceding vehicle has changed the path. |
Hands-off Detection & Warning : When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Smart Pilot Assist triggers hands off warning and it is
continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.
|
First stage warning will be provided immediately once hands off is detected
|
|
|
Second stage warning with audio alert will be provided if driver is not holding the steering wheel even after the first stage
warning.
|
 |
|
Third stage warning with audio alert will be provided when driver does not hold the steering wheel even after second stage
warning . Here after Smart Pilot Assist and ACC will go to Standby
|
 |
| • | Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle. |
| • | In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure. |
The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead
and must intervene if necessary, even if Smart Pilot Assist is being used.
Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not at
all.
System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper
curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane.
Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.
Smart Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's speed using the accelerator pedal and the brakes. Please be aware that there
may be a faint sound from the brakes when the system is using them.
Smart Pilot Assist may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the
center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision.
Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override Smart Pilot Assist
in such situations.
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Smart Pilot
Assist system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control
of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.
Smart Pilot Assist Automatic Cancellation
Smart Pilot Assist cancels and goes to standby when:
| • | ACC system cancels. |
| • | The maximum speed that Smart Pilot Assist supports is exceeded. |
| • | When driver shifts out of Drive gear. |
| • | An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs. |
| • | When turn indicator or hazard is activated. |
| • | When interface systems are not available. |
| • | When driver steers manually. |
| • | When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Smart Pilot Assist Operation. |
When Smart Pilot Assist cancels, the Smart Pilot Assist indicator changes to White color to indicate that system is no longer
active.
 |
When there is any failure in the system , below pop-up message appears on Instrument Cluster screen and Smart Pilot Assist
indicator illuminate in Amber color. Visit nearest Mahindra service center for assistance.
|
7.10.1 Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations
Smart Pilot Assist is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following
situations:
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
Note: All the limitations of ACC also apply for Smart Pilot Assist.
| • | Smart Pilot Assist is unable to accurately determine lane markings due to poor visibility (heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.), or an obstructed, covered, or damaged camera or sensor. |
| • | When driving on hills. |
| • | The road has sharp curves or is excessively rough. |
| • | Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the camera's view. |
| • | The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves. |
| • | When driving on winding or uneven roads. |
| • | When there is a lane closure due to road repairs. |
| • | When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane. |
| • | When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow. |
| • | On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. |
| • | On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable. |
| • | On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates. |
| • | When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker. |
| • | When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly. |
| • | Smart Pilot Assist function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind. |
| • | Smart Pilot Assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both the sides of the road. |
Smart Pilot Assist system can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if lanes are available on both sides. Smart
Pilot Assist cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides or if lane is
available only on one side.
– When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Smart Pilot Assist cannot do lane centering
8 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS 1
8.1 Control Switches
 |
The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:
|
|
A |
ORVM Folding/Unfolding Switch |
|
B |
ORVM Adjustment Switch |
|
C |
Driver Door Window Switch |
|
D |
Co–driver Door Window Switch |
|
E |
Rear RH Window Switch |
|
F |
Rear LH Window Switch |
|
G |
Door Lock/Unlock Switch |
|
H |
Window Lock Switch |
8.1.1 Driver Door Power Window Switch
Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in “ON” position.
The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the Driver door window switch on the driver door armrest/handle.
 |
 |
Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches
provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.
To lower/raise the window glass, press/lift the respective power window switch accordingly
Do not operate the power windows frequently when the engine is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.
If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration
to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, customer should
wait for 1-2 minute & should not operate the switch during this period. After 2 minute operate the switch.
It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.
To avoid any personal injuries always check and ensure that there are no obstructions like head, hand, etc. while operating
the 'power windows'.
8.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim has a power window lock switch to enable or disable operation
of rear passenger window switches.
 |
To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.
To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.
|
8.1.3 Door Lock/Unlock Switch
 |
The Door lock/unlock switch is located on the driver door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing
this switch as shown in the image.
|
8.1.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch
This is applicable for driver door only (if equipped)
Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the
direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.
 |
This feature consists of three functions:
|
Auto UP: Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to
hold the switch till the glass closes.
Auto DOWN: Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need
to hold the switch till the glass comes down.
Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If equipped): During auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value less than 100 N, The controller senses the
load and reverses the direction of the glass by 180 mm from the point of pinch detection. Anti-pinch is available in 0-250
mm from the top.
Driver door power window can be opened or closed through Remote also. Press PKE/RKE lock button more than 1 seconds to close
the power window. Press RKE unlock button more than 1 sec to open the power window. (If equipped)
Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once activated up movements are not allowed for 30s, and down
movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).
Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 Cycles before 1st activation and inhibition duration is 30 Seconds.
After 30s thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles available after inhibition is dependent on the idle
duration. Right after thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 seconds 2 cycles are available.
Do not remove vehicle battery while power window is in motion
Extended Power Window
All doors power windows can be rolled UP/DOWN within 3 minutes after ignition off.
8.2 Mirrors
8.2.1 Interior Rear-view Mirror (IRVM)
Manual Type (if equipped)
 |
The interior rear view mirror provides the rear view information to the driver through the rear windshield. It also assists
during reversing.
|
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other
vehicles behind you
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and
pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
8.2.2 Manual ORVM (if equipped)
 |
Exterior Rear view mirror on both left and right sides provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.
|
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.
Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you
see in the mirrors.
8.2.3 Electric Adjustable ORVM (If equipped)
 |
 |
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be
used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
8.2.4 ORVM Folding/Unfolding
Mirror Fold Function
To fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM folds automatically when:
| • | The doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle |
For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral position.
 |
 |
Mirror Unfold Function
 |
 |
To unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM unfolds automatically when:
| • | Mirror is already in folded condition and ORVM switch is neutral condition and IGN is turned ON |
ORVM memory functions and settings are connected with seat chapter.
8.3 Storage Compartments
8.3.1 Luggage Compartment (if equipped)
For 7-seat configuration: Second row and third row can be folded for keeping bigger/large objects.
 |
Fold down the third-row seats. (refer to “Folding the third-row seat” section)
Fold down the second-row seats. (refer to “Folding the second-row seat” section)
|
Now the bigger object can be placed with seat folded condition.
When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the luggage is placed firmly enough to avoid being shaken while
driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not
obstruct the field of the rearview
Do not sit on the folded seat because the seat belt and other safety devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause
serious injury in case of an accident
|
5 Seats Luggage Lid and Utility Bin:
|
|
|
Luggage Lid |
Utility Bin |
 |
 |
Luggage Lid/Utility Bin: In 5-Seater variants luggage space will be more comparing to 7 seater. Bigger items can be stored in the luggage lid/Utility
bin area.
|
Luggage Net (if equipped)
|
|
 |
To prevent items from shifting towards the rear quarter trim, you can use the 4 hooks located in the rear quarter trim to
attach the luggage net.
|
Make sure the luggage net is securely attached to the hooks in the rear quarter trim.
DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage
net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
8.3.2 Sun Glass Holder
Roof mounted sunglass holder is an integral part of the front interior lamp.
 |
 |
Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the
driver and front passenger.
Do not access the sunglass holder while you are driving. It may distract your concentration and could lead to an accident.
8.3.3 Glove Box/Tab Holder
Glove Box : The glove box is located on the Left side of Instrument panel. To open the lid, gently press the unlock push button. To close
the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.
 |
 |
It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when
needed.
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the vehicle
is in motion.
 |
Glove Box Lamp (if equipped): This lamp is located inside the Glove box below the TAB Holder. It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch
OFF when it is closed.
|
 |
Tab Holder: Tab holder is available in Glove box area. You can place the Tab inside the Tab holder.
|
8.3.4 Console Storage
 |
You can use the console storage by lifting the console lid with the knob.
|
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.
Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may
explode and cause a fire.
 |
 |
By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in the console storage. The console storage can be used as an
armrest for both the driver and the passenger.
Cooler (Air vents)
 |
In select variants, a cooler (air vents) is provided in the Console Storage. You can cool cans, small bottles, etc. by opening
the air vents. Turn the cooler clockwise to open the air vents, or anti-clockwise to close the air vents.
|
Only sealed cans/bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical components/cooler.
8.3.5 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest (if equipped)
Front Cup Holder:
 |
 |
The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed
or have a lid.
|
Second row cup holder and armrest (if equipped)
|
|
|
|
|
The Second Row 60P seat features an armrest with cup holder.
| • | To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown). |
| • | When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest. |
Third row cup holder and armrest (if equipped)
 |
The Cup holders are located on both the left and right-side trims.
|
Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids
can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss
of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
8.3.6 Bottle and Umbrella Holder
 |
Bottle and Umbrella holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store umbrella, maps, papers,
small books, bottles, etc.
|
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.
8.3.7 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket
 |
The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.
|
|
To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back
pockets.
|
|
8.3.8 Grip Handle and Coat Hook
Grip Handle: Foldable grip handles are provided above the front (passenger only) and second and Third row outboard seats.
Coat Hook: The second-row outboard passenger seats grip handles features a coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.
 |
Hanging excess/bulky weight/items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to the passengers. Hang light weight articles
only..
|
8.4 Microphone(as applicable)
The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown in the image.
 |
 |
The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone to the system.
8.5 Sun Visor
|
Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows. It is available on both driver and co–
driver side
|
|
 |
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
|
 |
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.
|
Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention
away or blocking your view
Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in moving
8.5.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped)
|
Vanity mirror is in the Sun visor.
|
|
 |
Swing the sun visor down and slide the cover to open and close the vanity mirror.
|
 |
Lamp above the sun visor will be ON once you slide and open the vanity mirror.
|
Lamp will not illuminate if arm is not correctly locked in the sun visor.
Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.
8.6 Center Fascia Switch
Center fascia switches are located at the center of the Instrument Panel.
There are three types of center fascia switches available based on the variants.
|
Sl. No. |
Switches |
|---|---|
|
A |
Passenger Air Bag ON indication |
|
B |
Passenger Air Bag OFF indication |
|
C |
Passenger seat belt indication |
|
D |
Hazard Switch |
|
E |
Home Screen*/ SVS*/ Rear Camera* |
|
F |
Display Off |
|
G |
Drive Mode |
|
* - if equipped |
|
When Passenger Air Bag is enabled/activated through the instrument cluster, then the 'PAB OFF' indicator light will turn off.
8.7 Driver Side Switch Bank
Driver side switch bank is located on the instrument panel below the right-side AC air vents.
|
Type 1 |
Type 2 |
 |
 |
The following switches are available in the driver door switch bank:
|
A
|
Dummy
|
F
|
Scroll Down*
|
|
B
|
ESP OFF
|
G
|
HDC ON
|
|
C
|
Scroll UP*
|
H
|
ESS OFF
|
|
D
|
Cluster Menu/Mode*
|
||
|
E
|
SET*/AWD*
|
*-if equipped
|
|
8.8 Power Outlet
Front USB Outlet
The USB outlets are provided on the center switch bezel below the infotainment control.
USB (A) as per the image provided can be used as an input to the music system. You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc.
as an input and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.
USB (B) can be used only for charging.
 |
A: LH - USB Port
B: RH - Charging USB Port (if equipped)
|
It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while
driving may distract your attention and lead to an ACCIDENT.
Second Row USB Outlet
 |
An additional USB outlet is provided on the rear side of the floor console below the second row AC vents.
It can be used only for charging and it is intended to be used by second row passengers.
|
Third Row 12V Power Outlet (If equipped)
 |
The 12V Power outlet socket is provided below the third row (RH) AC vents. Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile charger,
cigarette lighter etc., can be used in the outlet.
|
The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when
the engine is ON to avoid battery drain.
To avoid serious injury:
| • | Close the power outlet cap when not in use |
| • | Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet |
| • | When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual |
| • | Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping |
| • | Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet |
| • | Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances |
| • | Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet |
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which
could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any necessary
repairs.
To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:
| • | Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving |
| • | Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating |
| • | Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed |
| • | Use the power outlets only when the engine is running. Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine is OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to drain |
| • | Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V |
| • | Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle |
8.9 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped)
 |
A wireless mobile charging unit is located in front of the center console below the front USB ports.
|
The wireless charging will work in ignition ON, Cranking and Engine ON conditions only. It will not work when the vehicle
is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.
Follow the below steps to charging mobile in wireless mobile charger.
To start wireless charging, place the smartphone equipped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad and
turn the ignition ON
For best wireless charging results, place the smartphone in the center of the charging pad. Phone charging indication will
appear on the IVI screen.
The wireless charging system is designed for one smartdevice confirming to QI standard only. Please refer to your smartphone’s
user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smartphone supports QI wireless charging.
Recommended to place the phone on the center of the charger’s pad to start charging
Before charging remove the phone cover/case to improve charging efficiency
If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smartphone, the charging will be stopped
& a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the cluster. Kindly remove the coin or the metallic object. This
is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.
Do not place misalign your phone from the charging pad. It may not charge or give a warning on the cluster.
Do not place any smart key on the charging pad.
Keep the charging pad clean and dry.
Do not keep any Debit/Credit card between the phone & the charger. It may damage the card. A warning is displayed on the cluster
for the same.
8.10 Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC)
Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) is located on the centre console near the gear shift lever.
It is used to control the infotainment screen.
|
A
|
Media / Menu
|
|
B
|
Favourite
|
|
C
|
Home / Back
|
|
D
|
Phone and Connectivity
|
|
E
|
Rotary Knob/Scroll Knob
|
The following features can be used by Intelli Command Center Switch
|
S.No |
Button |
Event Type |
Event |
Action |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
1
|
Media
|
Push
|
Short
|
Display current media screen if active
|
|
Push
|
Long
|
Display source shortcut screen
|
||
|
2
|
Favorite
|
Push
|
Short
|
Recall favorite stored screen/page
|
|
Push
|
Long
|
Store current page/screen as favorite
|
||
|
3
|
Home/Back
|
Push
|
Short
|
Go One level up if applicable or else no action
|
|
Push
|
Long
|
Display HOME screen
|
||
|
4
|
Phone and Connectivity
|
Push
|
Short/Long
|
When Bluetooth OFF: Phone button press shall Turn ON Bluetooth and Show Device list screen.
|
|
Push
|
Long
|
When Bluetooth ON, but no device connected: Show Device list screen
|
||
|
5
|
Left
|
5-way Push type
|
Short
|
Move the Point of focus to left by 1 item
|
|
Long Press
|
Move the Point of focus to left by 1 item continuously until the press
|
|||
|
Right
|
Short
|
Move the Point of focus to right by 1 item
|
||
|
Long Press
|
Move the Point of focus to right by 1 item continuously until the press
|
|||
|
Up
|
Short
|
Move the Point of focus to UP by 1 item
|
||
|
Long Press
|
Move the Point of focus to UP by 1 item continuously until the press
|
|
S.No |
Button |
Event Type |
Event |
Action |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
5
|
Down
|
Double Press
|
Open App drawer
|
|
|
Short
|
Move the Point of focus to DOWN by 1 item
|
|||
|
Long Press
|
Move the Point of focus to DOWN by 1 item continuously until the press
|
|||
|
OK/Power
|
Double Press
|
Open Quick Application Drawer in infotainment screen.
|
||
|
Short
|
In Power On mode, select current items in Point of Focus
In Power Off mode, toggle System On/Off
|
|||
|
Long
|
Toggle System On/Off
|
|||
|
Scroll Knob (When controlling Volume)
|
Rotary Knob
|
Clicks, Direction
|
Increase volume of current Audio functionality by as many steps in case of clockwise direction
Decrease volume of current Audio functionality by as many steps in case of counter clockwise direction
|
|
|
Scroll Knob (When controlling Input)
|
Clicks, Direction
|
Move Point of Focus to the right/down by as many counts in case of clockwise direction
Move Point of Focus to the left/up by as many counts in case of counter clockwise direction
|
||
|
Note: The Intelli command center will primarily work for Infotainment functionality. |
||||
8.11 Lamps
8.11.1 Interior Lamps
Interior lamps comprises of front/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps and ignition key ring illumination.
These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry.
In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) and ignition key ring illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once all
doors are closed, the interior lamps gets switched OFF.
Switches on Roof Console (if equipped)
 |
A: LHS reading lamp
B: Door/ Auto Mode
C: SOS calling
D: Roof Lamp ON
E: RHS reading lamp
|
Front Roof Lamp – Type 1
 |
The front roof lamps are located in the roof console above the interior rearview mirror.
|
The roof lamp can be switched ON by pressing the switch 'D' (Refer Switches on Roof Console). Press the switch again to switch
OFF the roof lamp. Also, the lamp goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON again when unlock
button on RKE/PKE is pressed
For Auto mode - Auto Mode will be active when Switch 'B' is in pressed position. In Auto Mode, the roof lamps will turn ON automatically
when any of the doors are opened. The roof lamps will also turn OFF automatically after preset time once the doors are closed.
For Reading Lamp – Reading Lamp switches 'A' & 'E' can be independently pressed for LH and RH lamps. Press the switch again for switching OFF
Map Reading Lamp (if equipped):
 |
Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.
|
Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.
SOS calling
 |
The eCall system automatically notifies the emergency services if your car is involved in an accident. You can also call the
emergency services manually by pressing the SOS button.
|
This button should only be used in a real emergency.
Front Roof Lamp – Type 2
 |
The front roof lamp is in the roof console above the front seats. The courtesy lamp can be switched on using the middle switch
(B) on the lamp.
|
A: The courtesy lamp remains permanently ON in this position
B: The courtesy lamp remains in AUTO mode (if equipped) in this position. The lamp remains ON as long as any one of the doors
are open and switches OFF when all doors are closed properly
C: The courtesy lamp remains permanently OFF in this position
Centre Roof Lamp (if equipped)
 |
The center roof lamps can be switched ON by pressing the switch on it. To switch it OFF press the switch again.
|
In case, front roof lamp's 'AUTO' mode is ON, the center roof lamp also goes ON/OFF when the opening and closing of any of
the doors.
It cannot be switched off independently in auto mode.
8.11.2 Exterior Lamps
Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.
It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and
turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF”
to switch OFF all lamps.
i) Turn Signals
A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right
Taking a Right Turn:
| • | Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right |
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator
lamp.
Taking a Left Turn :
| • | Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left |
| • | After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp. |
If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of
the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.
Changing Lanes:
The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change
To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the
lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
ii) Parking Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position
from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the
parking lamp is switched ON.
The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must
turn OFF & turn ON manually.
Park Lamp Warning Buzzer
A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.
iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function
Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when
travelling through tunnels or low light areas.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd
position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function
| • | Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax |
| • | On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances |
| • | Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction |
| • | When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting |
| • | There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour. |
iv) Head Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to
switch ON the head lamps.
v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam
Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high
beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head
lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating high beam option selected.
|
A
|
Low Beam
|
B
|
High Beam
|
Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic
and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.
vi) Head Lamp Flash
Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.
Head Lamp Levelling System
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A
correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.
 |
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering
column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3.
|
|
Switch Position |
Vehicle Loading Condition |
|---|---|
|
0 |
Driver/Driver with Front Passenger |
|
1 |
Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied |
|
2 |
All seats occupied |
|
3 |
All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side |
Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.
8.11.3 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)
 |
When the switch is in the Auto mode and high beam. Then when the vehicle speed crosses 80 Kmph the high beam intensity and
reach increases. The higher reach of the beam is helpful to have vision for the higher speed
|
The booster will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed comes below 75 kmph
8.11.4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (if equipped)
To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.
To disable DRL: Whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode
If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through infotainment settings.
8.11.5 Cornering Lamp (if equipped)
 |
Cornering lamps are integrated in both the Fog lamps.
Respective side Cornering lamps turn ON when a sharp turn is taken.
They help in illuminating the road in the direction of turn.
|
The following conditions are to be met for the lamps to switch ON:
| • | Ignition ON |
| • | Head lamp is ON |
| • | Sharp turn taken |
8.11.6 Fog Lamps
Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.
Front Fog Lamps ON
To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps, rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control
stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as shown.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the operation status.
Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.
Fog Lamps OFF
Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as
shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.
8.11.7 Puddle Lamp (if equipped)
 |
Puddle lamps are provided at the bottom of the front doors. They are switched ON automatically when the front doors are opened.
This illuminates the ground below the respective door thereby assisting in a safe entry and exit.
|
8.12 Hazard Warning Lamp
The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch bank on the instrument panel.
Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The instrument cluster
turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.
 |
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your
vehicle.
|
The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.
8.12.1 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such
a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition
reset (Ignition Off and On)
8.13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS)
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp
low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal
from the RKE.
To enable FMH;
| • | Ignition transition from ON to OFF |
| • | Park lamp is OFF |
| • | Ignition key is out |
| • | Driver door open within 3 mins from KEY OUT |
| • | Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor |
To extend FMH;
| • | The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors |
| • | Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam |
| • | Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds |
To disable FMH
| • | Park lamp transition from OFF to ON |
| • | Ignition off to any other state |
| • | FMH ON 20 seconds expires |
| • | FMH Max time is 3 minutes expires |
With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further.
Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle is disarmed.
8.14 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (if equipped)
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp
low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds assisting the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to switching
off the engine, the head lamp were ON for a predefined time
To activate FMH:
| • | Switch OFF the parking lamps |
| • | Remove the ignition key |
| • | FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob twice. First press locks the vehicle & second press enables head lamp low beam for 20 seconds. |
| • | Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature & unlocks the vehicle. |
To extend the FMH feature further for 20 secs., press RKE LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum
3 minutes from the first activation.
With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the
head lamp ON and OFF.
To deactivate FMH:
| • | Switch ON the parking lamps |
| • | Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position |
| • | Press the RKE unlock/lock button once |
| • | Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically |
With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further.
Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.
8.15 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (if equipped)
LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 secs. helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely
and comfortably at night.
LMV is activated:
| • | Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times |
LMV is de-activated:
| • | Switch ON the parking lamps |
| • | Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position |
| • | Press the RKE lock/unlock button once |
| • | Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically |
To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum
3 minutes from the first activation.
With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle
the head lamp ON and OFF.
8.16 Remote Engine Start (If equipped)
This feature enables the customer can remotely Start/Stop the vehicle engine using mobile application.
This feature is mainly used to switch on the car air conditioner remotely via Adrenox connect app. When the engine starts,
the vehicle AC automatically turns ON (If DATC equipped). This feature is available in automatic transmission and manual transmission
variants with EPB.
The following conditions must be met for a vehicle to be started remotely:
| • | All doors including bonnet and tail door must be closed and locked. |
| • | Vehicle Automatic transmission should be in P (Park) OR Manual transmission (gear in neutral Position) with EPB applied . |
| • | Ignition must be in OFF position. |
| • | Sufficient Fuel and battery charge for the car to start. |
8.17 Windshield Wipers
8.17.1 Wiper Control Stalk
 |
A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)
B: Off
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO
D: Low Speed (LO)
E: High Speed (HI)
F: Rotary Switch
|
Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).
Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the
wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.
Intermittent (INT) (If equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the
wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary
switch (F).
Auto Mode (if equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates
based on rain intensity.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from
the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.
High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.
8.17.2 Wipe/Wash
Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid
from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer
spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.
When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:
After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in the
Intermittent mode.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be performed
5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.
The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.
8.17.3 AUTO Wash (if equipped)
When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield
for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times
AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.
8.17.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position
to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 seconds.
8.17.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position
to operate the rear wiper continuously .
8.17.6 Rear Wash
Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash
& wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will continue for
3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.
If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the
ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in
OFF position.
Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and
block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 deg C, use washer fluid with
anti-freeze protection.
| • | Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass |
| • | It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass |
| • | Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 secs. or when the reservoir is empty |
8.17.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear
 |
There are two nozzles in the front pleunam cover under the hood.
|
|
Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width
of the windshield.
|
|
 |
In the rear, one nozzle provided for the rear windshield wash.
|
Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir located in the Engine compartment.
9 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS II
9.1 Skyroof
A skyroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.
It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes
significantly more relaxed. A skyroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive
than wind blowing through a side window
9.1.1 Controls and functions
|
Switch Position |
Switch Press |
Operation |
|---|---|---|
|
1
|
Short Press
|
Sunshade Express Open
|
|
Long Press
|
Sunshade Manual Open
|
|
|
2
|
Short Press
|
Skyroof Express Open
|
|
Long Press
|
Skyroof Manual Open
|
|
|
3
|
Short Press
|
Skyroof Express Close
|
|
Long Press
|
Skyroof Manual Close
|
|
|
4
|
Short Press
|
Sunshade Express Close
|
|
Long Press
|
Sunshade Manual Close
|
|
|
0 & 5
|
—
|
Switch Home/Neutral Position
|
|
6
|
Short Press
|
Tilt Up
|
|
7
|
Short Press
|
Tilt Down
|
Toggle switch for the skyroof to operate. Home/Neutral position of the Switch (0) and (5). To operate the sliding skyroof
and Rollo shade Pull or Push or Tilt the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to Home position automatically.
You must switch ON the ignition to operate the skyroof.
9.1.2 Rollo Shade Open
 |
Pull the switch to position (1) for Rollo Shade Express (one touch) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
|
9.1.3 Rollo Shade Close
 |
Push the switch to position (4) for Rollo Shade Express (one touch) Close to close Rollo Shade completely. Manual (long press)
Close to stop at desired position.
|
9.1.4 Skyroof Open
 |
Pull the switch to position (2) for skyroof Express (one touch) opened. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
|
Skyroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button
 |
|
| • | Sunshade will be open followed by skyroof. |
| • | Skyroof / Sunshade movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement. |
9.1.5 Skyroof Close
 |
Push the switch to position (3) for skyroof Express (one touch) Close. Manual (long press) Close to stop at desired position.
|
Skyroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button
 |
|
| • | Skyroof / Sunshade movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement |
| • | Skyroof /Sunshade movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement |
If antipinch is detected 3 times continuously within 10 seconds, then smart close though Remote key will not work for next
30 sec. User can manually close skyroof through switch from console.
Skyroof Smart Close while Raining
 |
If Rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for
closing the skyroof. Using Steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the Skyroof.
|
In RLS variant, Skyroof and Sunshade will close automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time(12 hours) during
the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked state.
|
|
|
Skyroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition
 |
User can open and close skyroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON
|
9.1.6 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application
 |
User can open and close skyroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF
|
9.1.7 Skyroof Tilt Open/Close
 |
Tilt/Rotate Up the switch to position (6) for skyroof Tilt Open
Tilt/Rotate Down the switch to position (7) for skyroof Tilt Close
|
9.1.8 Pinch Protection For The Power Skyroof
| • | Pinch protection can help reduce the risk of pinching injuries when closing the power skyroof.. |
| • | If the power skyroof closing meets resistance or there is something in the way, the power skyroof opens again immediately. |
| • | Check why the power skyroof did not close & avoid such incident in future for your safety |
| • | Try to close the power skyroof again |
| • | Without pinch protection, the power skyroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury. |
| • | Always be careful when closing the power skyroof. |
| • | Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries |
| • | If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for assistance. |
9.1.9 Emergency Close Feature
| • | The express (One Touch) / Manual (long press) skyroof and Rollo Shade Close function may not work due to - |
| • | Consecutive several attempts to close skyroof and Rollo Shade. |
| • | Pinch protection is only for closing skyroof and Rollo shade. |
| • | Excessive Ice / Dirt accumulation on the skyroof Glass / guiderails. |
Follow the emergency close command as below:
| • | Emergency close feature can be used, if Sliding skyroof or Rollo shade consecutive reversal movement observed 3 times within 10 sec then continue with step 2 as below to use Emergency close feature. |
| • | On the 4th attempt continuously push the skyroof close switch - position (3) or Rollo shade close switch - position (4) until it closes completely to ensure occupant privacy, safety & theft prevention from skyroof open window. This is Emergency Close Feature. (Never keep your hands or head in the skyroof window while performing this operation it may cause severe injury, since Anti-pinch function will not work at this 4th attempt). |
| • | Once the skyroof or Rollo Shade is completely closed, release the switch. |
| • | Alternatively, User may wait for min. 30 secs before operating skyroof and Rollo Shade, then skyroof can be operated with Normal Functions. |
| • | If the skyroof doesn’t operate as above, Visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance. |
9.1.10 Initializing The Power Skyroof
Condition for Initializing the Skyroof /Rollo Shade
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected during skyroof / Rollo shade movement and reconnected or it is dead or any fuse
is replaced, the skyroof / Rollo shade must be initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch
protection function will be deactivated.
Initializing command procedure:
| 1. | Turn ON the ignition (Pre condition shall be Close position for both skyroof and Rollo shade) |
| 2. | Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ (3) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds after the roof is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from skyroof . |
| 3. | Close the Rollo shade fully by pushing ‘ Rollo Shade close switch’ (4) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds after the Rollo shade is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from Rollo shade. |
| 4. | The Initializing command is complete, Check if the Express open/close features are working. |
If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.
9.1.11 Self Learning The Power Skyroof
Self learning command procedure:
| 1. | Self-learning must be performed when skyroof/ rollo sunshade assembly is replaced or when false anti-pinch reversal movement (reversal without any obstruction) is noticed |
| 2. | Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ and keep the switch pushed continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform. |
| 3. | Sliding skyroof will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure. |
| 4. | Close the Rollo fully by pushing ‘Rollo Shade close switch’ and keep the switch pushed continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform. |
| 5. | Rollo will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure. |
| 6. | The Self learning command is complete. |
Incase skyroof and Rollo Shade Close switch is released in the middle of procedure, repeat from step 1.
| • | To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the skyroof before opening or tilting it in winter season. |
| • | Always close the skyroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the skyroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage. |
| • | Remove leaves and other objects from the skyroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner. |
| • | If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See an Mahindra Authorised Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility. |
| • | The Rollo Shade can be opened and closed independently when the sliding skyroof is in closed position. |
| • | During sliding skyroof Express (one touch) open/tilt operation, Rollo Shade will also open in synchronization with sliding skyroof (Express - Complete Open Feature). |
Do not remove vehicle battery while skyroof is in motion
| • | Improper use of the power skyroof can result in serious personal injury. |
| • | Always make sure that no one is in the Path/Cutout of the power skyroof when it is Closing or Opening |
| • | Always take the key with you while leaving the vehicle. |
| • | Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the skyroof . |
| • | Never stand or sit on skyroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the skyroof which will not be covered in warranty. |
| • | Never keep the Luggages / weights on top of the roof/skyroof |
| • | Any wet area found on the headliner should be reported to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer Immediately |
9.1.12 Wind Buffeting
When you drive the vehicle with the window or skyroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears
or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx of in air through the window or
skyroof and due to its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or skyroof
9.1.13 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure
 |
|
 |
|
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
 |
|
| • | Now pour 1 liter of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not |
If water is not draining kindly contact the Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
| • | High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards skyroof seals and Rubber components. |
| • | Do not use High pressure water on skyroof area. |
| • | It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro fiber cloth during cleaning. |
| • | Skyroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower. |
9.2 Power Window and Skyroof Smart Close and Open
This feature is applicable only for driver door power window (if equipped with anti pinch operation)
9.2.1 Smart operations in Ignition OFF State
a). Using PKE/RKE Key Fob
| • | Skyroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition off with all doors closed, if the key fob lock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get locked and Skyroof & power window will get closed automatically. |
| • | Skyroof & Power Window Smart Open- During ignition off, if the key fob unlock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get unlocked and Skyroof & Power window will be opened along with blower ON in fresh air mode (for approximately 40 seconds) |
If any of the doors status is not changed for 45 seconds, doors will get locked, Skyroof will get closed but power window
will be left open
b). Using Adrenox Command
Adrenox command will work only when
| 1. | Ignition is off and |
| 2. | Doors in locked state and |
| 3. | Key fob is not inside the vehicle |
Power Window Smart Open
Power Window Smart Close
Skyroof Smart Open
Skyroof Smart Close
 |
User set PIN will be required to execute AdrenoX commands
|
c). Timer Based Control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off, if Skyroof is open for more than a predefined time (for approximately 12 hours), skyroof and sunshade
will get closed automatically.
d). Rain detection based control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off and doors are in locked condition, If rain is detected skyroof & sunshade will be automatically closed.
9.2.2 Smart operations in Ignition ON State
a). Using Alexa Voice Command
User can open and close Skyroof via voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.
. .Alexa, Open Skyroof ....... .Alexa, Close Skyroof
User can open and close driver side power window via Voice command through Alexa during ignition ON (will open/close only
driver side window)
. .Alexa, Open Windows....... .Alexa, Close Windows
b). While Wiper is ON
Skyroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition ON condition, if front wiper is ON for approximately around 10 seconds (varies based on wiper modes), a
notification requesting user confirmation for closing the Power Window & Skyroof will be displayed. On confirming the same,
both will be closed.
9.3 Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning System (HVAC)
HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air
flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment.
By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches provided on the DATC/ETC control panel, located on center console, occupant’s
comfort can be ensured.
HVAC system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled
by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of HVAC blower.
Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor
compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating
oil.
Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it
adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change
Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure.
The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation
and frostbite.
They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants,
it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.
- If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to
lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.
Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger compartment.
To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions.
Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front
of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.
9.3.1 Air Vents
 |
Side Vents: The two side vents are located one each at the left and right extreme ends of the instrument panel. Both the side vents provide
air flow to the front seat passengers.
Centre Vents: Two center vents are located below the infotainment screen in the center console. Both the center vents provide air flow
to the front seat passengers. Direct air to the desired direction by adjusting the Louvres up/down or left/right.
Defogger Vents
There are four defogger vents in your vehicle: two side defogger and two windshield defogger vents.
They are located just below the windshield. The side defogger vents prevent the front windows from defogging.
Second Row Vents: The second row AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console.
Third Row Vents: The third row vents (LH & RH) are located on side trims on either side of the third row seats.
It will be provided only for variants which have the third-row seats
9.3.2 Electronic Temperature Control (if equipped)
|
A |
Temperature control Knob |
|
B |
Air distribution/Mode switches |
|
C |
Front defogger switch |
|
D |
Blower speed control knob |
|
E |
Rear Defogger switch |
|
F |
Rear A/C switch |
|
G |
Recirculation mode switch |
|
H |
Economy Mode switch |
|
I |
A/C switch |
Temperature Control Knob
By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired
level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon
selected position of the temperature control knob, the desired discharged air temperature can be obtained.
By rotating the knob anti-clockwise and setting it to the extreme left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the knob
is rotated clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer and at the extreme right position, hot air is
discharged.
Blower Speed Control Knob
The blower force-circulates the air through the HVAC unit and distributes it throughout the passenger compartment.
Blower is OFF when the blower speed control knob is set to small (Blower Symbol) position (extreme left). To switch-ON the
blower, rotate the control knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.
Economy Mode switch (ECON)
ECON switch turns ON economy mode. During ECON AC operation the system automatically cuts OFF at a higher temperature than
normal AC. The operation can be used during mild weather conditions for better fuel efficiency. Comfort level may be compromised
during this operation.
Press the ECON switch again to turn OFF economy mode.
A/C switch
This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.
When the air conditioner is functioning, air gets cooled and de-humidified before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot
weather conditions, it will take a slightly longer time to cool the interior as compared to cooler weather. Fuel consumption
will be relatively higher if the vehicle is being driven with the air conditioner ON.
AC will function only when both engine and blower are switched ON.
| • | In certain operating conditions when the engine gets overheated, the engine management system may switch off the air conditioner intermittently |
| • | The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. This allows AC system components to get lubricated periodically and ensures optimum system |
| • | During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner may not function until temperature of the air near the evaporator rises above a predefined threshold |
| • | When air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle |
Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulation mode switch ON)
To set the HVAC system to recirculation mode, press the recirculation mode button. The LED on the button illuminates, indicating
the recirculation mode is active. In this intake mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be sucked by the
blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/polluted region, re-circulation mode can be selected for short
periods. Driving with this mode active, may lead to better fuel economy and longer HVAC filter life. However, running the
air conditioner in re-circulation mode for long will make cabin air too dry and oxygen level drops inside cabin the turning
the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake control in recirculation mode for long, with air conditioner switched OFF,
will make cabin air too humid and windshield and window are more likely to become foggy. Hence, never drive in recirculation
mode for long, shift back to fresh air mode intermittently.
Never keep recirculation mode selected continuously for long period. Prolonged use of the HVAC system in recirculation mode
may cause windshield/windows to mist/fog-up, impairing visibility which can lead to an accident, endangering you and others.
Fresh Air Mode (Re-Circulation Mode Switch Off)
To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, press the re-circulation mode button again. The LED on this button switches OFF,
indicating that fresh air mode is active. In this intake mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower
and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
Rear AC switch
Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.
Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC switch is turned ON
Air Distribution/Mode switches
The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air distribution/mode switches.
| • | Face Mode — When face mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second row vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the face of the passengers |
| • | Face-Foot Mode — When Face-Foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second row vents, Foot vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same time |
| • | Foot Mode — When foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the two foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers seated on front seats |
| • | Foot and Front Defogger Mode — When foot and front defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the foot vents, side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers while de-misting/defogging. |
| • | Front Defogger Mode — When Front Defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure de-misting / defogging. |
Rear Defogger Switch
Rear defogger switch is located on the ETC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on
the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF
the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on
ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half
the duration of the first activation.
9.3.3 Dual Automatic Temperature Control (if equipped)
|
A |
Co–Driver Temp control Knob |
H |
A/C ON Switch |
|
B |
Front defogger switch |
I |
OFF switch |
|
C |
Rear Defogger switch |
J |
Rear A/C switch |
|
D |
Blower speed control Switches |
K |
MAX A/C Switch |
|
E |
Auto Mode Switch |
L |
Mode Switch |
|
F |
Recirculation Mode Switch |
M |
Dual mode switch |
|
G |
Driver temp control knob |
 |
Below mentioned switches/knobs in DATC control panel is pressed/Rotated, respective icons and changes are displayed in the
infotainment screen.
|
Blower speed control switches
You can adjust the airflow by Pressing the Blower speed control switches with ignition ON. If you adjust the airflow using
blower speed control switches in AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator on Infotainment screen goes off and the operation mode is changed
to the manual mode.
Blower speed can be increased by pressing the blower speed '+' switch and blower speed can be decreased by pressing the blower
speed '-' switch.
The air conditioner does not operate by directly pressing the blower speed control switches if the A/C switch is not pressed.
However, the air flows due to the fan operation.
AUTO switch
If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator appears on Infotainment screen and the set temperature is maintained
while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.
The indicator lamp lights up while AUTO switch is operating, and the lamp turns off when the AUTO switch is turned OFF.
Front Defogger switch
Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp turns ON, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses
while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators shows up in the Infotainment screen. If you press the switch again,
front defogging stops with the indicator lamp turns off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While the front defogger
switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the front defogger mode switch is turned ON.
OFF switch
You can turn off the Dual automatic Temperature controller (DATC) by using this switch.
Co–Driver temperature control knob
To adjust the co-driver side temperature as desired, rotate the co-driver temperature control knob while the AC is ON. The
temperature decreases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in anticlockwise direction & Temperature increases,
when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction.
The co-driver set temperature is visible on the infotainment screen
When co-driver temperature knob is rotated, Dual mode automatically Turns ON.
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
Recirculation mode switch
If you press this switch with AC ON, the indication lamp lights turn up and the air recirculation indicator on Infotainment
display is displayed. If you press this switch again, the indication lamp turns off and the air source selection is changed
to Fresh air intake mode.
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache,
drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through
a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode in operation.
Automatic selection of the fresh or air circulation mode
When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous
mode is restored.
DUAL switch
This function allows controlling the Co-Driver side temperature separately with engine ON.
| • | If you press the DUAL mode switch, the indicator lamp lights up and DUAL mode indicator on the infotainment displays comes on |
| • | When the driver temperature control knob is rotated, the driver side temperature on the infotainment display is adjusted as desired and when co-driver temperature control knob is rotated, co-driver side temperature on the infotainment display is adjusted as desired |
| • | While the DUAL mode switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the DUAL mode switch is turned OFF. |
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
Mode switch
Each time you press this switch with IGN ON, the air distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure below.
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the system is changed to the manual control mode (AUTO indicator
OFF).
 |
Face-Mode |
 |
Foot-Mode |
 |
Face/Foot-Mode |
 |
Foot/Defogger-Mode |
When choosing foot mode, some air flows out from windshield defogger vents , Side defogger vents and side vents.
Driver temperature control knob
To adjust the temperature as desired, rotate the driver side temperature control knob
The temperature decreases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction & temperature increases,
when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction
A/C Switch
Air conditioner is turned ON and OFF with this switch. While air conditioner switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights
up, and the lamp turns off when the AC is OFF.
Rear A/C switch
Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.
Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC switch is turned ON
MAX A/C switch
MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short period of time.
When MAX AC switch is pressed
| 1. | In cabin temperature is set to minimum |
| 2. | Blower fan speed is set to Max |
| 3. | Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode |
| 4. | Air distribution mode is set to Face mode |
Rear Defogger Switch
Rear defogger switch is located on the DATC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on
the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF
the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on
ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half
the duration of the first activation.
9.3.4 DATC – Auto Operation Mode
|
1 |
Co–driver Temp Control Knob |
3 |
Driver Temp Control Knob |
|
2 |
Auto Indicator ON |
Use only when the engine is running.
| 1. | Press the AUTO switch. |
| 2. | AUTO indicator is displayed on the Infotainment Screen. |
| 3. | Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature control knob. |
| 4. | The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature. |
| 5. | If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing the dual mode Switch and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control. |
When you use the blower speed control switches, mode switch (air source selection switch) or defogger switch during the auto
operation mode, AUTO indicator on the display goes out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.
9.3.5 DATC – Manual Operation Mode
|
1 |
Co–driver Temp Control Knob |
4 |
Recirculation Mode Switch |
|
2 |
Mode Switch |
5 |
Driver Temp Control Knob |
|
3 |
Blower Control Speed Switch |
Use only when the engine is running.
| 1. | Press AC ON switch |
| 2. | Set the desired temperature by rotating the temperature control knob |
| 3. | Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed control switches |
| 4. | Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode switch |
| 5. | Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode switch |
In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling
the temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, and DUAL temp. selection control switches.
To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
9.3.6 DATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment Screen
Climate Control Setting also can be done through infotainment screen.
 |
|
| • | Under Climate control screen select Climate icon |
| • | All HVAC setting can be changed by pressing respective symbols or buttons in climate screen |
 |
 |
9.3.7 Remote Cooling
 |
Remote cooling feature allows user to control Cabin climate settings from outside the vehicle.
|
Activate Remote Cooling feature
 |
Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press "start engine" button in the Adrenox connect mobile App
|
In Automatic transmission vehicle
| • | All Doors closed |
| • | Gear is in PARK position |
| • | Fuel level is greater than 10 liters |
| • | Vehicle should be in Standstill |
In Manual transmission (with EPB) vehicle
| • | All Doors closed |
| • | EPB is Engaged |
| • | Fuel level is greater than 10 liters |
| • | Vehicle should be in Standstill |
| • | Gear is in Neutral |
 |
When vehicle is started remotely using Adrenox connect mobile App, By default Cabin climate settings will be changed to 18
deg C in Auto mode.
In remote Engine start condition user will have access to control below Cabin climate setting under Climate settings
|
| 1. | Duration time : User can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using Adrenox connect mobile App, Duration can be selected from minimum of 2 mins to maximum of 15 mins. |
| 2. | Cabin Temperature settings: User can change temperature settings during Remote cooling |
| 3. | Front defrost: User can Activate /De-activate front defrost during remote cooling by selecting front defrost option in mobile app |
| 4. | Rear Defrost: User can Activate /De-activate Rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear defrost option in Adrenox connect mobile App, |
Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback in the Adrenox connect mobile App,
|
|
Remote cooling can be De-activated by using Mobile App. if vehicle is already in Remote start condition by Pressing start
engine button, Remote cooling will be deactivated.
In Mobile App customer will get notification if Remote cooling is failed.
|
Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is recommended
not to operate Remote cooling when vehicle is parked in a closed environment.
9.3.8 Rear AC Control
Third Row Blower Speed Control
Rear blower speed control knob is provided below the third row (RH) vent to control the air flow to the third-row vents.
The third row AC is switched ON by the Rear AC button on the DATC/ETC Control panel . The airflow is controlled by the rear
ac blower speed control knob on the third row RH side trim.
9.3.9 Rapid Cabin Cooling
Rapid Cabin Cooling In DATC
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
| • | Make sure that all the windows are fully closed |
| • | Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face |
| • | Turn ON AC |
| • | Press MAX AC Switch |
Rapid Cabin Cooling In ETC
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
| • | Make sure that all the windows are fully closed |
| • | Set the blower to maximum speed |
| • | Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face |
| • | Set the air distribution control to face mode |
| • | Set air intake control to recirculation mode |
| • | Turn the air conditioner ON |
| • | Set the temperature control knob to extreme left (coolest) position |
For faster cabin cooling, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable
temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.
If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the windows closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the first few
minutes. This will help in venting the hot interior air out and allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly. In case
you are leaving the vehicle parked in sun frequently then activate the Active Cooling Option.
9.3.10 Rapid Cabin Heating
For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
| 1. | Make sure that all the windows are fully closed. |
| 2. | Set the blower to maximum speed. |
| 3. | Set the air distribution control to foot mode. |
| 4. | Set air intake control to recirculation mode. |
| 5. | Set the temperature control knob to extreme right (hot) position. |
| 6. | For de-humidified heating, switch the air conditioner ON. So on rainy conditions if the heater is ON then also keep the AC ON. |
For faster cabin heating, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable
temperature, blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.
In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant takes time to get heated up. Hence, it might take a while for hot air
discharge, even when blower is running and temperature control dial is set to hot position.
9.3.11 Points to Remember
| • | For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently |
| • | If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove ice deposited before using wiper |
| • | In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield |
| • | Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of windshield clean |
| • | Reduced air flow because of clogged HVAC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions |
| • | Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer |
Your vehicle is equipped with a HVAC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the HVAC
filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.
Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.
9.4 Surround View System (If equipped)
Surround View System assists in parking and low speed maneuvering by providing views of vehicle’s surroundings with the help
of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors.
When driver activates SVS by switch while driving forward above 15 km/h vehicle speed , it assists by providing rear surroundings
view.
Before using the system, Make sure that the camera lenses are clean and not covered by any dust or other obstructions that
may impair the system.
Disclaimer
| • | The cameras in Surround View System provide only the view and do not detect or alarm if any obstacles are in the view. Driver must check for the surrounding for any possible collisions with obstacles. |
| • | There is a noticeable blind area of about 20cm where the cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. Driver must be careful to check for any obstacles in the blind areas. |
| • | Surround View System provides the views by stitching the views from the four cameras with respect to their geometric orientations. If the position or the installation angle of any of the camera is changed e.g. after a collision, then do not use the feature for safety reasons as the image stitching may not be correct. |
| • | If the exterior mirror is folded or out of place then image stitching may not be correct. |
| • | Use the Surround View System only when all the doors and the tailgate are closed. |
| • | The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is not real and may not represent your actual vehicle. |
| • | Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of the field of view of the cameras are not displayed. |
| • | Camera lenses distort the actual view surroundings to capture more coverage. The objects appear are altered and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the screen. |
| • | The accuracy of the orientation decreases when the vehicle is raised/lowered based on the occupant’s weight. |
The display screen shows the direction in which the rear of the vehicle is travelling when showing rear view. The front of
the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so that the exterior
mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.
9.4.1 SVS Activation and Deactivation
Use any of the following methods to activate SVS
| • | Press SVS Hard Switch on center fascia switch bank. |
| • |
 |
| • | System activates when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position regardless of vehicle speed or switch position. |
SVS deactivates when one of the following action is performed
 |
|
| • | When driver activates SVS through Reverse gear or at lower speeds (< 15 km/h) then SVS display goes off if vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h while driving forward. |
When reverse gear is engaged, SVS cannot be deactivated by SVS hard switch press.
SVS is a supplementary driving assist function. Always check the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on
what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location.
9.4.2 SVS Views
SVS provides different Views, Drive blind spot view monitor, Video Recording, Parking Guidelines, Parking Assistance etc.
to assist the driver. In certain views, you can rotate 3D surroundings. Refer below sections on how to use each function
How to select Views
| • | To display the icon bar, touch the notch in top middle of screen. |
| • | Touch an icon 1-8 to select a desired view. |
| • |
 When you touch car model in the bird’s eye view area, an oval will appear with 8 camera icons to switch different 3D views.
|
 |
|
3D Surroundings View will not be available at vehicle speed above 15 km/h
Oval in bird’s eye view will be automatically hidden after 8 second of no operation.
|
Sl. No
|
Icons
|
Description
|
|---|---|---|
|
1.
|
 |
This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in front of the vehicle.
|
|
2.
|
 |
This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
|
|
3.
|
 |
This view helps you with left side view near the front tire when parking.
|
|
4.
|
 |
This view helps you with right side view near the front tire when parking.
|
|
5.
|
 |
This view helps you to see the objects closer to rear bumper.
|
|
6.
|
 |
This view helps you to see the objects closer to front bumper.
|
|
7.
|
|
In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D.
|
|
8.
|
 |
You can have each camera wider view (almost 180 degree view) by pressing this icon which helps in crossing junctions.
Also When you are in 3D surroundings mode , you can have 3D surroundings in full screen view by pressing this icon.
you can exit full screen view by touching icon.
|
|
9.
|
Refer Image No: W62K47
|
This view is bird’s eye view / 2D top view which gives top down view of vehicle surrounding by stitching all four camera images.
|
|
10.
|
Refer Image No: W62K47
|
When you touch this area, front surroundings view will be seen in the left screen area
|
|
11.
|
When you touch this area, rear surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
|
|
|
12.
|
When you touch this area, left surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
|
|
|
13.
|
When you touch this area, right surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
|
|
|
14.
|
 |
You can view SVS settings option using this Icon.
|
|
15.
|
 |
You can capture screen shot of Infotainment screen using this Icon.
|
Default View Selection
You can select 2D or 3D as default view and when you activate SVS , it shows 2D or 3D surroundings view based on your selection.
If you select 2D view, you can select Normal or Wide View as default view to be shown whenever you activate SVS.
 |
To select default view, touch SVS Settings icon and then touch
 |
Automatic Side View
 |
Touch SVS settings icon and enable Automatic Side View. You can see left/right 3D view in Infotainment when left/right turn
indicator is activated in forward /D gear.
|
A pop-up message on the screen appears
When:
- The tailgate is opened.
- The driver's door is opened.
- The passenger's door is opened.
Surround view system displays the combined images from the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be different from
the actual vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are
in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.
Transparent Bottom View (If equipped)
When you touch on SVS car in bird’s eye view, SVS car changes to semi-transparent and view beneath the ground (Transparent
Bottom View) will be visible once the vehicle starts moving as lane marking under vehicle bottom is visible in below image.
 |
Until the vehicle moves, the bottom portion is shown as black opaque box
Touch again on SVS car in bird’s eye view to revert to opaque car model.
|
Transparent Bottom View will not be available at vehicle speed above 15 km/h
Transparent bottom view is based on image stored in the memory based on past few image frames taken some time back and doesn’t
display live feed. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.
9.4.3 Static & Dynamic Guidelines
Disclaimer
Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as references only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to passenger
occupancy.
 |
Dynamic Guidelines indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle.
|
| • | Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with respect to the parking slot. |
| • | During parking, you can compare the Static guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines to know if your vehicle placement is in line with the parking slot lines. |
| • | Color coding (Red,Yellow,Green) on the static lines help in assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the ground plane] from the vehicle’s boundary. |
 |
You can select from settings to have parking guidelines (Static and Dynamic) in 2D or/and 3D Views.
|
9.4.4 Parallel and Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking Assistance
Disclaimer
Parallel and Perpendicular Parking are only assistance and driver should take care of surrounding for collisions.
A. Vertical/Perpendicular Parking
Step 1:Selecting the Perpendicular Parking Mode
Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view.
| • | It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely. |
 |
 Choose Vertical Parking icon from SVS settings. Below overlays (Ref Img No: W62K54) will appear on either side.
|
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
| • | Move the vehicle either forward or backward so that the end point of the shortest arc [either blue or green, based on the side in which the vehicle will be parked], is coinciding with the parking slot line. (Blue arc line as shown in the image Ref. Img. No. W62K54) |
| • | Once it is done, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking slot, till the rack end/extreme end move of steering wheel. |
Step 3: Parking the Vehicle
| • | Start Reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and reverse car until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete |
| • | Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping |
 |
|
B. Parallel Parking
Step 1: Choose the Parallel Parking Mode
| • | Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that Camera can have the parking slot view and choose Parallel parking icon
 |
 |
Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side as below image (Ref Img. No. W62K56).
|
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
| • | Move the vehicle forward or backward, so that the one of the rectangular box is placed inside the parking slot |
| • | Make sure there are no obstacles in the green parking slot after orange pole. |
| • | Turn the steering wheel in the direction in which parking is intended. |
Step 3: Park the Vehicle
| • | Hold the steering in the current position once selecting the parking area after turning the steering wheel as the area color turns green as in below image screens. |
 |
 |
 |
|
 |
|
| • | Continue reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and keep reversing the vehicle until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete |
 |
|
9.4.5 Blind-Spot View Monitor
Blind-Spot View Monitor displays the driver's and passenger's side rear view area including some blind area which cannot be
viewed from rear view mirror.
To activate the BVM, select Blind View Monitor from Instrument Cluster Settings.
When the left/right turn indicator is activated, respective video feed (left/right BVM) will be displayed in Instrument Cluster.
|
Left Side |
Right Side |
|
|
|
To turn off BVM, deactivate turn indicator.
Other Instrument Cluster warning messages and screens takes priority over BVM hence BVM may not be available always when you
activate it.
BVM view may not be visible clearly during night time due to camera limitations.
BVM is only view and may not detect, alert or control if any vehicles in blind area. Like all assistance function, BVM has
limitations. Sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.
Objects are closer than they appear. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change the lane before doing so may result
in crash and serious injury or death.
9.4.6 Drive Video Recording (If equipped)
The cameras installed on the vehicle body record the video of the vehicle surroundings during driving which can be used for
fault diagnosis, accident evidence identification and to capture special event during driving.
SD card is used to store the recorded video.
When there is no SD card, system shows “No SD card” text.
General and Emergency Recording
When the engine is started, video recording starts and files are saved in “General Video” folder inside DVR interface.
In General Video Folder, the old recording files will be overwritten cyclically to keep the latest recordings.
It will be disabled in setting or if already in DVR screen it will come out when vehicle speed > 5 kmph or Blind View Monitor
is ON or Vehicle is in Reverse Gear.
You can record special event during driving by SVS hard switch long press (approximately 4 seconds). These videos are saved
in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Video Recording
Videos of deployed crash, Automatic Emergency Braking events etc. are also saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Videos will be recorded and saved in memory when the conditions met and battery connection is intact and not disturbed
by any means.
Video clips stored in the Emergency Folder can’t be overwritten and can be deleted by user only..
How to access DVR screen
Open SVS settings and touch the "Drive Video Recording" icon to access the DVR function.
Below screen appears with “Live View”.
 |
A: General Video
B: Emergency Video
|
Under the DVR display interface, click "Back" icon to exit the DVR screen.
The recording mark and recording time appear on the “Live View” screen when a video is getting recorded.
"Live View" can be accessed even if there is no SD card.
Video Playback
| • | Under DVR interface, click "Emergency Video" folder or "General Video" folder to replay any video file. |
| • | Saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded video. Video files are saved with .AVI file extension. Eg. File Name - 20151203_163028.AVI
20151203 - YYYYMMDD (Y-Year, M-Month, D-Day)
163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)
|
| • | Click the “edit” button to delete/move video files. |
Current recording will get paused during video playback.
 |
Playback and editing interface show as below:
|
 |
1: To close a video
2: To replay previous video
3: To play video fast backward
4: Pause/play
5: To play video slow forward
6: To replay next video
|
DVR Settings
 |
|
When memory is full, System shows a text message for user to delete files.
9.4.7 SVS Troubleshooting
| • | When there is any error in system/camera lost connection, the corresponding camera view on screen shows green color with an icon indicating camera error. Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for assistance. |
| • | In case of malfunction , system shows a pop-up message "Please Contact Service Center" |
9.4.8 System Limitations
| • | Surround View System is subject to certain system limitation and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations: |
-During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
-At night or in very dark places.
-Display may get flicker, if the area around cameras area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
-If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
-If your vehicle got damaged and if any camera position and the settings got changed.
-When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the camera lens..
-When the head lights are not bright due to dirt on the lens of if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
-When strong light rays falls on the camera. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise
of sunset).
-When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).
| • | Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light and area around is dark/shadowed. |
| • | SVS Camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing and stitching. |
| • | Sometimes during SVS activation , you may not see stable video feed as some parameters update happens. |
| • | When SVS is used in the area with AC light sources , black bands might be seen running in the video feed. |
| • | If video file is corrupted , you may observe black screen while replaying the video and system will reset to default view. |
| • | During video playback, you may observe green screen sometimes. |
| • | DVR may not record properly if the power is interrupted in between of usage. e.g during crash, low battery, removal of battery and other reasons. |
| • | Use SD card as fresh and formatted before first use and do not swap SD cards frequently. |
| • | SVS is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective. |
| • | Avoid using SVS if you are having eye color blindness or impaired color vision. |
| • | Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car. |
| • | SVS video is shown based on driver activation but it cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors. |
| • | Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision. |
System Maintenance
| • | Always keep all camera lens clean. Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error and reduced visibility. |
| • | Always use clean water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens |
| • | Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the cameras with a power washer. |
| • | When SVS parts need to be replaced due to damage/ non-functioning / any other reason or abnormal video with "No Panoramic Calibration" text , Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for recalibration. |
| • | Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much pressure. |
10 EMERGENCIES
10.1 Hazard Warning Flashers
|
|
The hazard warning flasher button is in the central bezel switch bank. Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning flashers,
all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming traffic.
|
This is an emergency warning system and should be used only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is a safety hazard for other motorists. Hazard warning flasher will work in all positions of the ignition key and even
when the vehicle is fully locked.
With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain your vehicle battery.
10.2 Towing
Tow hook is a screw on type, and it is available in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.
|
Front Tow Hook |
Rear Tow Hook |
 |
 |
Remove/pry out the tow hook cover in the Front/Rear bumper using a screwdriver, Screw in the tow eye in the anti-clockwise
direction (tow eye is LH threaded) by holding the cover and tighten. Fasten a cable or chain specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles to the towing hook.
The rear tow hook should be used when your vehicle is utilized for towing other vehicles.
If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency,
your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a towing cable or chain.
10.2.1 Towing Equipment
|
Towing Option |
2WD |
Towing Condition |
Wheels OFF the Ground |
All Wheel Drive Models |
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
Flat Bed Towing |
ü |
On Trailer |
ALL |
ü |
|
Flat Towing |
O |
Flat Tow |
NONE |
O |
|
Sling Type Towing (Front Wheel Lift) |
ü |
Dolly Tow |
Front |
O |
|
Sling Type Towing (Rear Wheel Lift)
|
O |
REAR |
O |
Towing equipment are of two types:
Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift
the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's suspension and body.
Avoid a tow with sling type equipment
Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing
10.3 Emergency Assistance
|
In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either
from the car or through mobile phone.
|
10.4 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / intermittently
| 1. | Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean. |
| 2. | If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the interior lamps. |
| 3. | If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jumpstarting. Follow ‘jump starting’ instructions given later in this chapter. |
| 4. | Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Instrument Panel Fuse Box. |
If the engine cranks normally, but does not start
If the engine is cranking normally, but if the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, Contact an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before
trying again.
If the engine stalls while driving
| • | Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. |
| • | Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster. |
| • | Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 seconds and try starting the engine again. |
| • | . If the vehicle still does not start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. |
If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.
If the engine speed does not increase
| • | If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management System, electrical or electronic controls. |
| • | In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp. |
| • | Have your vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible. |
10.5 Engine Overheating
If the temperature gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that
may damage the engine.
When the engine overheats, the Engine Management System reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF;
it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting
to drive again.
Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down:
| • | Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road |
| • | Turn ON the hazard warning flashers |
| • | Keep the engine running at idle |
| • | Engage the parking brake |
| • | Switch off the air conditioner |
| • | Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H |
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious
while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery
tank is maintained between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages to heat exchangers
and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, cooling fan blades and the engine belt all are in good condition.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/
failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However,
if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section under the 'Instrument cluster features' chapter for details.
If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components from
overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents.
Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system
is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not taking
precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended engine
coolant.
10.6 Jump Starting
Jump start can be performed when the battery charge is low which can be confirmed by performing the following operations:
| 1. | Turn headlamp ON and check whether lights are dim |
| 2. | Try to start the vehicle and check whether engine cranks slowly or not crank at all. |
| 3. | Open the bonnet and locate the battery. It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both cables and terminals.
Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals before jump starting the vehicle.
|
| 4. | The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it. |
| 5. | The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it. |
| 6. | A standalone booster battery can be used to start the engine when the vehicle battery is low. |
| 7. | Take jumper cables and unwind the red and black cables. |
| 8. | Wear safety gear and connect one end of red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. |
| 9. | Similarly, connect one end of black clamp of the jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery and other end to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery. |
| 10. | Once the jump starting assembly is done, crank the engine for starting. |
| 11. | Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment. |
| 12. | Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery and the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery. |
| 13. | Similarly, disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. |
| 14. | Close the bonnet |
| 15. | Keep the vehicle's engine running and slightly accelerate the vehicle to charge the battery. |
If the problem persists on next starting cycle, please visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer
 |
|
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.
| • | Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine compartment) |
| • | Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery |
| • | Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery |
| • | Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery |
| • | Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery |
Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning)
These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery
| • | Keep the vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not start, either your battery might be dead or faulty alternator. |
Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.
Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic control units.
To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minutes to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal
injury.
While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator, Electronic control unit failures.
Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing
the two vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.
10.7 Limp Home Mode
Limp Home Mode is an emergency declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure or malfunction of one/more critical
sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel quantity
/ injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop. The drivability & fuel consumption
will be greatly affected.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management
system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in
the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited, and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It
is recommended you contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately for assistance.
If the above telltale is ON/blinking, It indicates an emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due
to failure of one/more critical sensors/actuators and triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode.
10.8 Fuses & Relays
A fuse is electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating
of the fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit
from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it
must be replaced with a new one.
 |
Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching or attempting to change a fuse.
|
 |
Fuse puller is available at the engine compartment fuse box .
|
Fit replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have removed.
You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller
should be used to remove the fuse from its position.
10.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box
 |
 |
Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle battery. Release the lock to access the fuse box contents. Remove
the fuse box cover by pressing the clips from both sides using both hands simultaneously. Spare fuses are provided in the
fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.
|
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses) |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Fuse No. |
Circuit |
Fuse Rating |
|
F1 |
EMS Batt 1 (Diesel) |
15A |
|
EMS Batt 1 (Petrol)
|
30A |
|
|
F2 |
EMS Batt 2 (Diesel) |
10A |
|
VVTIN/EX, VOP, Canister (Petrol) |
10A |
|
|
F3 |
HFM/FMU/FEED Pump Relay (Diesel) |
10A |
|
Ignition Coils (Petrol) |
15A |
|
|
F4 |
BMS* |
5A |
|
F5 |
Spare |
— |
|
F6 |
EMS ECU Permanent Batt |
5A |
|
F7 |
Spare |
— |
|
F8 |
Horn |
20A |
|
F9 |
Head Lamp Batt +ve 1/ DRL RH |
10A |
|
F10 |
Head Lamp Batt +ve 2/ DRL LH |
10A |
|
F11 |
TCU Batt (AT only) |
15A |
|
F12 |
EMS Loads – Relay /WIF/EGR BP (Diesel) |
15A |
|
EMS Loads – Lambda/(Petrol) |
10A |
|
|
F13 |
Brake Lamp (Switch) |
10A |
|
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses) |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Fuse No. |
Circuit |
Fuse Rating |
|
F14 |
Front Blower |
40A |
|
F15 |
Spare |
— |
|
F16 |
ABS Valve (ABS ESP) |
25A |
|
ABS Valve (ESP EPB) |
40A |
|
|
F17 |
Spare |
— |
|
F18 |
ABS Pump |
40A |
|
F19 |
Spare |
— |
|
F20 |
EMS Main |
40A |
|
F21 – F24 |
Spare |
— |
|
F25 |
SCR Relay (Diesel)
Intercooler Fan (Petrol) |
10A |
|
F26 – 29 |
Spare |
_ |
|
F30 |
AC compressor EVDC |
10A |
|
F31 |
Fuel Pump |
20A |
|
F32–F35 |
Spare |
_ |
|
F36 |
Shifter Solenoid (AT Only) |
5A |
|
F37 |
Starter |
30A |
|
F38 |
Glow plug (Diesel Only) |
50A |
|
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses) |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Fuse No. |
Circuit |
Fuse Rating |
|
F39 |
Main Batt-3 |
60A |
|
F40 |
Cooling Fan Low Speed |
40A |
|
F41 |
Main Batt - 2 |
60A |
|
F42 |
Main Batt - 4 |
60A |
|
F43 |
Main Batt - 1 |
60A |
|
F44 |
ABS IGN |
5A |
|
F45 |
TCU IGN (AT Only) |
5A |
|
F46 |
EMS IGN |
5A |
|
F47 |
Water Pump/SCR Relay*(Diesel) |
15A |
|
Turbo Rec Valve /IC Fan Relay (Petrol) |
10A
|
|
|
F48 |
NOx (Diesel) |
10A |
|
EMS Relay Loads (Petrol) |
5A |
|
|
F49 |
EPS |
125A |
|
F50 |
Radiator Fan (High Speed) |
60A |
|
F51 |
Alternator |
150A |
|
Relays |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Relay No. |
Relay Type |
Application Detail |
|
R2 |
ISO Power Relay (70A) |
Cooling Fan High Speed |
|
R3 |
ISO Power Relay (70A) |
Glow Plug (Diesel Only) |
|
R6 |
Ultra Micro Relay (20A) |
Intercooler Fan (Petrol Only) |
|
R8 |
Ultra Micro Relay (20A) |
Shifter Solenoid (AT Only) |
|
R11 |
Ultra Micro Relay (20A) |
Fuel pump |
|
R13 |
Ultra Micro Relay (20A) |
Horn relay |
|
R14 |
Mini Relay (40A) |
EMS main |
|
R15 |
Mini Relay (40A) |
Cooling fan low speed |
|
R16 |
Mini Relay (40A) |
Front blower |
|
R22 |
ISO Micro Relay (35A) |
Starter |
|
R23 |
Ultra Micro Relay (20A) |
AC compressor |
|
R25 |
Ultra Micro Relay (20A) |
SCR (diesel only) |
|
R1,R4, R5, R7, R9, R10, R12, R17, R18, R19, R20, R21, R24, R26 & R27 |
Spares |
|
10.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure
Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards. This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the
driver side
Follow the below procedure to access the IP fuse box,
 |
|
 |
|
 |
 |
| • | Using a star screw driver, loosen and remove the IP driver lower trim bottom mounting star screws. |
 |
 |
| • | Partially detach the IP driver lower trim assembly. |
| • | Remove all the electrical connectors from IP driver lower trim and outward the panel to access the Instrument Panel fuse box. |
|
Fuses |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Fuse No. |
Circuit |
Fuse Rating |
|
F1 |
Spare |
20A |
|
F2 |
Rear Power Window |
30A |
|
F3 |
Power Window LH |
30A |
|
F4 |
Spare |
15A |
|
F5 |
Accessory Power |
25A |
|
F6 |
Power Window RH |
30A |
|
F7 |
ORVM Switch, WLC |
5A |
|
F8 |
Spare |
5A |
|
F9 |
360 Camera Batt |
5A |
|
F10 |
ITM Batt |
15A |
|
F11 |
Roof Lamp Batt |
5A |
|
F12 |
Spare |
10A |
|
F13 |
Spare |
10A |
|
F14 |
Infotainment Batt |
15A |
|
F15 |
MBFM Batt 5 |
15A |
|
F16 |
MBFM Batt 1 |
25A |
|
F17 |
MBFM Batt 2 |
30A |
|
F18 |
Flush Handle Batt 1 |
10A |
|
F19 |
PKE Batt1 / Immo Batt |
10A |
|
F20 |
ICC Batt |
5A |
|
F21 |
IGN - HVAC, Amplifier, Infotainment |
5A |
|
F22 |
IGN - MBFM, Gateway, Cluster, Display |
5A |
|
Fuses |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Fuse No. |
Circuit |
Fuse Rating |
|
F23 |
MBFM Batt 4 |
20A |
|
F24 |
Skyroof Batt |
20A |
|
F25 |
Gateway Batt |
5A |
|
F26 |
Batt - Cluster Display |
7.5A |
|
F27 |
Pke Batt 2/ Ignition Switch Batt |
10A |
|
F28 |
Batt Power Seat Switch, OBD, HVAC |
5A |
|
F29 |
RLS Batt |
5A |
|
F30 |
Rear Blower Batt |
10A |
|
F31 |
Batt - Key Lock Solenoid AT and ITS |
5A |
|
F32 |
Spare |
20A |
|
F33 |
Flush Handle Batt 2 |
10A |
|
F34 |
ESCL Batt |
7.5A |
|
F35 |
Eng Comp IGN |
5A |
|
F36 |
IGN - Airbag |
5A |
|
F37 |
IGN - APAS, 360/RVC, Flush Handle |
5A |
|
F38 |
IGN - WLC, Radar, Windshield Camera |
5A |
|
F39 |
IGN - EPS |
5A |
|
F40 |
IGN - CB Switch, Reverse Lamp MT, DS Switch |
7.5A |
|
F41 |
IGN - PKE/IMMO |
5A |
|
F42 |
IGN - ITM, EPB Switch, Power Seat |
5A |
|
F43 |
IGN - Reverse Lamp AT |
10A |
|
Fuses |
||
|---|---|---|
|
Fuse No. |
Circuit |
Fuse Rating |
|
F44 |
ACC - Amp, HVAC, Infotainment |
5A |
|
F45 |
SPARE |
25A |
|
F46 |
ACC - Power Seat Vent |
10A |
|
F47 |
ACC - Rear Power Socket |
15A |
|
F48 |
Front Power USB |
5A |
|
F49 |
ACC - PKE, ICC |
5A |
|
F50 |
Start |
5A |
|
F51 |
MBFM Batt3 |
25A |
|
F52 |
Spare |
30A |
|
F53 |
Power Seat Batt |
15A |
|
F54 |
Amplifier Batt |
30A |
|
* - if equipped |
||
10.9 Changing a Flat Tyre
In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road
to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and turn ON your hazard warning
flashers.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you
reach a safe location.
Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety
equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never
to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.
Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed
by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.
Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive
on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After changing a flat Tyre, never store
the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in
the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;
10.9.1 Warning Triangle
The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.
 |
It is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.
|
When you pull over your vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Meters behind,
Night: 200 Meters behind)
When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving
Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle
(Daytime: 100 Meters, Night: 200 Meters) to warn other vehicles
Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic.
When your safety is secured, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for your emergency service
When your safety is secured, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for your emergency service
10.9.2 Tool Kit
The tool kit is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor. It consist of jack, Screwdriver (+and-),
Jack operating lever, Tow bar, DEO Spanner (10mm x 12mm) and Wheel spanner
|
A |
Jack Assembly |
|
B |
Wheel Spanner |
|
C |
DEO Spanner 10mm x 12mm |
|
D |
Diesel Filter water drain Tool* |
|
E |
Screwdriver |
|
F |
Jack Operating Lever |
|
G |
Tow Bar |
|
* – Diesel Variant Only |
|
Jack is located on the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats on the floor. To remove the jack out, follow the process
below:
 |
 |
Lift the Luggage floor Lid as shown in the illustration
Take the jack out from the tool kit organizer
10.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal
Spare wheel is located below the floor at the rear end of the vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nut underneath the
rear luggage compartment floor carpet.
|
|
|
 |
Locate the plug covering the securing nut below the rear luggage compartment floor carpet and remove the plug
|
 |
Loosen the securing nut anticlockwise to winch down/lower the secured spare wheel to the ground
|
 |
 |
| • | Tilt and Remove the securing bracket out of the spare wheel hub |
| • | Remove/pull away the spare wheel |
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel
| • | Temporary Spare Wheel provided is specifically designed for your vehicle. |
| • | Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel simultaneously. |
| • | Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel. |
| • | While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. |
| • | Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle. |
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident
causing death or serious injury.
Refer to “Temporary Spare Wheel” section in the Starting and Driving chapter for more details.
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is smaller in size (T155/90 R18 113M) and for temporary purpose only. Do not use
the spare wheel for continuous running.
10.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening
Before loosening the wheel bolt, Wheel cover/cap must be removed. To remove the wheel cover, wrap the tip of a screwdriver
with cloth, insert it near the lugs of the wheel cover and pry the cover away from the wheel.
Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal
injury.
 |
Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel bolts anti-clockwise to loosen as per the sequence.
|
To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the end
of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts
but loosen them by one or two turns.
Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while tightening or Loosening the wheel bolts.
 |
A: Flat Tyre
B: Chocks Blocks
|
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the
wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
10.9.5 Jacking
 |
Locate the jack points in the front or rear as needed. They can be identified by a slot used to fit the jack precisely.
|
 |
Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.
|
 |
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack. Fit the other end of the lever into the square slot of the wheel
spanner and turn it clockwise to expand the jack.
|
Ensure no one is in the vehicle. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more
ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
underbody of vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
| • | Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing |
| • | When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack |
| • | Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle |
| • | Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel |
| • | Follow jacking instructions |
| • | Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack |
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
Remove the wheel bolts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the
holes in the wheel with the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt inserted through its hole. Wiggle the wheel
and press it back for fitting balance bolts.
Before putting on the wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels
without good metal to metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel bolts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to
come off while driving.
 |
Reinstall the wheel bolts with the tapered end inward and tighten by hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel bolts
further.
|
Never use oil or grease on the bolts. Doing so the spanner slips, damaging the bolts and may cause personal injuries. Also,
bolts may loosen, and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt,
clean before installing wheel bolts.
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel bolts using the wheel spanner. Turn the jack-operating lever anti-clockwise
using the wheel spanner to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension.
Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the
spanner is securely engaged over the bolt.
 |
Tighten each bolt a little at a time in the diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the bolts are
tight.
|
Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of
vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the
specified torque.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered
to the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 83-104Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Restore the tools (jack, wheel spanner, Punctured tyre, etc.) in their storage locations.
|
|
 |
Drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking
or adjusting tyre pressure, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage or valve damage.
Remove the centre cap from the alloy wheel before fixing it to the spare wheel location. From the inner side of the wheel,
gently tap the cap with the wheel spanner.
11 MAINTENANCE
11.2 Technical Specifications
|
Technical Specifications |
||
|---|---|---|
|
ENGINE |
Diesel (MT/AT/AWD) |
Petrol (MT/AT) |
|
Displacement/Cubic Capacity |
2184 cc |
1997 cc |
|
Type |
4 Stroke, Turbocharged, DI engine |
4 Stroke, Gasoline Direct Injection |
|
Compression Ratio |
16 ± 0.5: 1 |
9.5 ± 0.5: 1 |
|
Max. Engine Output |
114 kW @ 3750 rpm or
136 kW @ 3500 rpm |
149.2 kW @ 5000 ± 50 rpm |
|
Max. Torque |
360 Nm @ 1500 to 2800 rpm or
420 Nm @ 1600 to 2800 rpm or
450 Nm @ 1750 to 2800 rpm |
380 Nm @ 1750 to 3000 rpm |
|
TRANSMISSION |
||
|
Type |
6 Speed Manual/Automatic |
|
|
No. of Gears |
6 Forward, 1 Reverse |
|
|
STEERING |
||
|
Type/Description |
Column mounted Electric Power Steering |
|
|
SUSPENSION |
||
|
Type/Description |
Front: Coil Spring with side load compensation on McPherson Strut with Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber
Rear: Multi Link Control Blade Suspension with Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber & Linear Coil Spring
|
|
|
BRAKES |
||
|
Service Brake |
Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted Booster with ABS (Standard) & with ESP (Optional) |
|
|
Front/Rear |
Disc |
|
|
Parking Brake |
Mechanical Hand Operated (Conventional Type) (or)Electric Parking brake
|
|
|
WHEELS & TYRES |
||
|
Rim |
Regular (Alloy & Steel) –7J X 17”, Optional – 7J X 18”, Spare wheel –4.5J x 18
|
|
|
Tyres |
Regular – P235/65 R17, Optional – P235/60 R18, Spare Wheel –T155 /90 R18
|
|
|
Type |
Radial Tubeless |
|
|
Laden Tyre Pressure (Psi) |
Front / Rear - 32 (Up to 5 Persons), Front / Rear - 35 (6 Persons to Fully Laden)
Spare Wheel Tyre – 60
|
|
|
FUEL |
||
|
Fuel Tank Capacity |
60 liters |
|
|
DEF Tank Capacity |
20 liters (only for Diesel) |
|
|
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM |
||
|
System Voltage |
12V |
|
|
Battery Rating |
72 Ah / 90 Ah (As per the variant)
|
|
11.3 Bulb Specification
|
Lamp Bulb |
Wattage |
Bulb Type |
No. of Bulbs per Vehicle |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Head Lamp - High Beam |
12V 55W |
H7 55W/LED |
2 |
|
Head Lamp - Low Beam |
12V 55W |
H7 55W/LED |
2 |
|
DRL / Position Lamp |
LED |
— |
|
|
Turn Signal Lamp (Front) |
12V 24W |
PY24W |
2 |
|
Turn Signal Lamp (Front) |
LED |
||
|
Turn Signal Lamp (Front) |
Sequential LED Light blade |
||
|
Turn Signal Lamp (Rear) |
LEDs |
||
|
Side Turn Indicator Lamp |
LEDs |
||
|
Front Position Lamp |
12V 5W |
W5W |
2 |
|
Front Fog Lamp |
LEDs |
||
|
Front Cornering Lamp |
LEDs |
||
|
Rear Position Lamp - Tail gate |
LEDs |
||
|
Rear Position Lamp - Quarter slide |
LEDs |
||
|
Stop Lamp - Body Side |
12V 21W |
P21W |
2 |
|
Reverse Lamp |
12V 16W |
W16W |
2 |
|
Registration Plate Lamp |
LEDs |
||
|
High Mounted Stop Lamp |
LEDs |
11.4 General Owner's Information
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and
money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble-free, safe
and economical operation. It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance
service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control system limited warranties specify
that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips and in dealership training programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on
your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer service department does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements
on your vehicle reliably and economically.
Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the performance, dependability, long life and better resale value
you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required
to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it's running
great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine maintenance:
| • | Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner's Manual |
| • | Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section |
| • | Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the warranty and Service Information Guide |
| • | Consult with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs |
Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle
Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered
by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.
Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done
that is not on your maintenance log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know about it.
Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list has several items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Service
adviser/Relationship manager and list the items in order of priority.
Need Assistance? : It is recommended talking to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this
process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership.
If an Mahindra Authorised Dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They
would need the following information:
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and office), Mahindra Authorised Dealer name, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra
warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and accessories are available at any Mahindra
Authorised Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as intended, it's also the best way to protect
your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the warranty and Service Information Guide will invalidate
warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough how important it is to keep records
of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered under warranty.
Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled
maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance,
be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage at the time of service.
This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you will have all the documentation
to show you've properly maintained it.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern
or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material
contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Mahindra
Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.
Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends
against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these
systems using different specifications and performance features. That's why it's important to rely on your Mahindra Authorised
Dealer to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.
Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Getting your vehicle serviced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence,
it is recommended to service your vehicle at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer only.
Maintenance Interval: Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage
to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends
that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.
Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions
| • | Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting |
| • | Set the parking brake |
| • | Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly |
| • | Turn OFF the engine and remove the key |
| • | Stay clear of hot vehicle parts |
| • | Avoid repeated contact with fluids |
| • | Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts |
| • | Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts |
Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.
11.5 Engine Compartment
Petrol Layout
|
A |
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir |
D |
Engine Oil filling Cap |
G |
Engine Compartment Fuse Box |
|
B |
Degassing Tank |
E |
Engine Oil Dipstick |
||
|
C |
Brake Fluid Reservoir |
F |
Battery |
Diesel Layout
|
A |
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir |
D |
Engine Oil filling Cap |
G |
Engine Compartment Fuse Box |
|
B |
Degassing Tank |
E |
Engine Oil Dipstick |
||
|
C |
Brake Fluid Reservoir |
F |
Battery |
11.6 General Maintenance
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is ON.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed
below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend to run the engine.
In the Engine Compartment
| • | Front windshield washer fluid level |
| • | Engine coolant level |
| • | Battery condition |
| • | Brake/Clutch fluid level |
| • | Engine oil level |
| • | Fluid leaks |
| • | Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities |
Inside the Vehicle
| • | Lights |
| • | Warning lamps |
| • | Windshield wiper and wash |
| • | Steering wheel |
| • | Seats/Seat belts |
| • | Accelerator pedal/Brake pedal |
| • | Brakes |
| • | Parking brake |
| • | Gear lever shift mechanism |
Outside the Vehicle
| • | Lamps |
| • | Fluid leaks |
| • | Doors and engine bonnet latches |
| • | Tyre inflation pressure |
| • | Tyre surface/thread and wheel Bolts |
11.7 In the Engine Compartment
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak,
have the cause found and corrected immediately.
Engine Oil: Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil regularly.
Engine Oil Consumption: It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during operation. Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:
| • | Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber |
| • | Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there |
| • | Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and quality of the oil, and upon the conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned |
11.7.1 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil
| • | Make sure the vehicle is on ground level |
| • | Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle down into the oil sump |
| • | Apply the parking brake |
| • | Open the bonnet, use stay rod to support the bonnet. Protect yourself from engine heat |
| • | Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick |
| • | Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again |
| • | If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL
|
| • | To access the engine oil filling remove the engine top cover. |
| • | If the oil level is below or near the "Min" mark, add enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the “Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minutes after every top-up for the oil to settle down before checking the level |
 |
|
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine oil capacity and grade.
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick
and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
11.7.2 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
| • | Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine |
| • | Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature |
 |
|
| • | In case the coolant level is below the "MIN" marking, the coolant should be topped-up |
| • | The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the 'MIN' but remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank |
| • | However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at Mahindra Authorised Dealer |
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine Coolant capacity and grade.
Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion protection.
Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand of coolants is not recommended and should be avoided.
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe
burns by the erupting liquid.
11.7.3 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid
The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same reservoir (Applicable for manual transmission vehicle).
 |
The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels
between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid.
|
If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation
could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately.
Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the
reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.
Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
11.7.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up
Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.
The windshield washer is located behind the RH Head lamp in the engine bay.
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.
If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury
or accident.
11.7.5 Fuel Filter Water Drain (Diesel)
 |
|
The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry in the fuel filter and respective tell tale ON in cluster. Follow
the below procedure to drain the water;
| 1. | Park the vehicle on a ground level |
| 2. | Apply Parking brake and block the wheels. |
| 3. | Switch off the ignition |
| 4. | Turn the drain plug (Tool is available in the tool kit) anti-clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the plug |
| 5. | Wait till the water drains (few seconds) |
| 6. | Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the plug firmly |
11.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle
Lights: Make sure the Head lights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check headlight
aim.
Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.
Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely
in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched
position.
Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.
Brake/Clutch Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.
11.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle
The following checks should be carried out from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have
the cause found and corrected immediately.
Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures
the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the Tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.
11.10 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra authorized genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the
battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To
prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough
to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.
For Best Battery Service
| • | Keep the battery securely mounted |
| • | Keep the battery top clean and dry |
| • | Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease |
| • | Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda |
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.
While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the negative
terminal is connected last.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle
for an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your battery during storage.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery
when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated
area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components.
Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if
equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.
The company shall not be liable/responsible for any damages/ injuries, including consequential damages/ injuries, resulting
due to fitment of non OEM approved batteries
Checking the Electrolyte Level
Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of three months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte
levels. If the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water until the level reaches the upper marker.
Adding distilled water:
| • | Remove the vent plugs |
| • | Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly |
11.11 Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with
a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it replaced
at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
11.11.1 Changing the Wiper Blade
| 1. | Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.
|
| 2. | Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm. |
| 3. | Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support. |
| 4. | Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal. |
To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.
11.12 Appearance Care and Protection
11.12.1 Washing the Exterior
| • | Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap |
| • | Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces |
| • | Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight |
| • | Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results |
| • | Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting |
| • | It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle |
| • | Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time |
11.12.2 Engine Compartment
Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or underbody with pressurized water.
11.12.3 Exterior Chrome
| • | Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo |
| • | Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag |
| • | Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface |
| • | After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects |
11.12.4 Paint Chips
| • | Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color |
| • | Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for paint touch-up or paint repairs |
| • | Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips |
| • | Always read the instructions before using the products |
11.12.5 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (if equipped)
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:
| • | Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water |
| • | Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers |
| • | Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents |
11.12.6 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. You
can use these cleaners:
1. For routine cleaning of plastic parts
2. For tar or grease spots
3. For plastic head lamp lenses
11.12.7 Windows and Wiper Blades
The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly,
substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial
car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or
chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items, follow these tips:
| • | The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer |
| • | The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly |
| • | Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches |
| • | Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts |
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion,
clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive
cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield
heater grid lines (if equipped).
11.12.8 Interior Maintenance
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
| • | Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner |
| • | Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner |
| • | If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover |
| • | Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials |
| • | Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. |
11.12.9 Display Maintenance & Cleaning
Infotainment/Cluster Display Maintenance:
Infotainment/Cluster display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore
user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.
Cleaning the display area:
| • | It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface. |
| • | Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation. |
| • | Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool. |
| • | Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly. |
| • | Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area. |
| • | Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately. |
| • | The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, car keys etc… |
| • | When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen. |
| • | Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not be used. This may cause discoloration or strain. |
| • | Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration. |
Display care: Your XUV700 has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe
the display with a clean soft cloth.
CONTINUED USAGE OF DISPLAY WITH DUST OR DIRT CAN CREATE MICRO-SCRATCHES DO NOT WIPE DUST OR DIRT WITH DRY ROUGH CLOTH OR BY
HAND
11.12.10 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim
Use only soft microfiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument Panel/Interior Trim.
Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral PH soap and water using soft microfiber / cotton cloth / sponge,
then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior
trim areas.
| • | Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection |
| • | Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior trim |
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as
follows:
| • | Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth |
| • | Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly |
| • | Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes |
| • | Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds |
| • | Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth |
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
11.12.11 Leather Seats (where applicable)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:
| • | To clean, use a soft microfiber / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth |
| • | To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer |
| • | Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating |
In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the
leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
11.13 Air Conditioning System Maintenance
Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified
technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes
with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system.
This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.
11.14 Vehicle Storage
If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you may want to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the
negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting.
This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place.
11.15 Winter Care
Dealing with Ice: Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you're stuck, having a small shovel is useful to
dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can
be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal protection such as a warm coat,
hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.
Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank: Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave
you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time to time to keep warm.
Do not: Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than
the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window
Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will crack your windshield
During Winter Storage: Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind:
| • | Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly |
| • | Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well |
| • | Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system |
Exterior: Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.
Vinyl and Rubber: Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.
Interior: Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what's there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and
corners.
Engine: Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to
do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don't corrode.
If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before
driving the vehicle.
11.16 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement (if equipped)
Below procedure is applicable only for variants having Head lamp bulbs.
To replace the head lamp bulb:
| • | Ensure ignition is switched OFF |
| • | Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp |
| • | Remove the bulb assembly with connector from the head lamp by unlocking the wire clamp |
| • | Detach the bulb assembly from the wiring connector near to the head lamp |
| • | Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same wattage), and follow the reverse procedure to assemble the bulb assembly in the headlight assembly |
| • | Clamp the bulb assembly by wire clamp properly |
The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the head lamp assembly from the vehicle. The head lamp assembly has been
removed here for illustration purpose only.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact
with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burn injuries, do not replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and are
to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic
holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally fitted bulbs.
12 ANNEXURE
12.1 Emission Control System – Multi Languages Alerts
13 INFOTAINMENT
13.1 Safety Precautions
Before using this device, take some time to read through this Instructions Manual.
Knowledge of the operation procedures will help in getting the best performance out of your new Infotainment System. Figures
from the display and panel presented in this manual are examples provided for best explaining how the commands are used. Thus,
display figures presented may be different from those actually presented on the device display. Illustrations, technical information,
specifications and descriptions of this brochure were correct until the date of printing. We safeguard the right to make any
required amendments according to the ongoing development and improvement.
To avoid risk of damage and/or fire, observe the following precautions;
| • | To avoid short-circuits, never insert metallic objects (for instance: coins or metallic tools) into the unit. |
| • | If you notice that the unit is releasing smoke or strange smell, promptly disconnect the supply and consult the nearest or Mahindra service Center. |
| • | Pay attention not to let the unit fall down, and neither beat the device strongly. Internal glass components of the unit may be damaged, making it non-operative. |
| • | This system has a Capacitive type touch panel. Select the desired option in the screen using his / her finger. Do not use any sharp objects on the touch screen. On selection the selected item is highlighted as an acknowledgement. |
13.1.1 Cleaning of the Unit
If the front panel of this unit is dirty, clean it with a dry cloth or slightly soaked in water. If the front panel is too
dirty, clean it with a cloth moistened with neutral soap and then repeat the prior operation.
Do not use any cleansing spray with this unit, as that can affect its mechanical parts. If you clean the front panel with
a rough cloth that may scratch the surface.
Features described herein are subjected to availability depending on vehicle variants. Please contact authorized personal
for more information.
13.1.2 User Controls
13.1.2.1 Touch Screen Display
The Infotainment system is equipped with a 10.25” touch screen TFT display.
It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Navigation, Vehicle controls & settings
13.1.2.2 Intelli Command Center (ICC)
ICC is combination of Joystick & switches for easy ergonomic access for the driver & co driver.
It has 4 shortcut keys + a central rotary knob.
The ICC rotary knob can be selected for volume or for browsing (by enabling the corresponding options in settings).There are
options with long press(for Infotainment user Off) & short press(for select command or Infotainment user ON)
13.1.2.3 Steering Wheel Control (SWC)
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.
|
A: Mute
|
E: Source
|
|
B: Volume +
|
F: SEEK UP
|
|
C: Volume -
|
G: SEEK DOWN
|
|
D: Call Connect
|
H: Voice / Call Disconnect
|
| 1. | Mute switch is for muting the audio playing in Infotainment |
| 2. | Volume control can be done with the help of this switch to increase the volume, move the switch upwards and to decrease it move the switch downwards. |
| 3. | Call connect is used to accept the incoming call & also it enable the driver to open the contacts list in Infotainment & make the call. |
| 4. | Source switch is used to change the source of audio playing in the Infotainment whether USB or FM. |
| 5. | Seek up/down switch can be used for toggling up/down the menu list of Infotainment. |
| 6. | Call Disconnect switch is used when the call is over, and the user wants to cut it then switch can be pressed. |
This provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving, without any distraction
13.2 Landing Screen Overview
 |
The AdrenoX Screen can be split in to 4 sections
|
|
Fun in XUV700
|
Android Auto
|
|
Fun with XUV700
|
Apple Carplay
|
 |
|
 |
|
13.2.1 Fun in XUV700
|
Fun in XUV 700 shows all the media, phone, navigation, 3rd party application options.
|
||||||||||||||||
|
Home Screen Details
Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System
|
||||||||||||||||
 |
 |
 |
13.2.1.1 Radio
 |
The Radio tile allows quick access to radio features and the Radio menu.
|
||||||
|
|||||||
|
||||
 |
 |
|||
|
A: Mute
|
E: Source
|
|
B: Volume +
|
F: UP
|
|
C: Volume —
|
G: DOWN
|
|
D: Call Connect
|
G: Voice/Call Disconnect
|
Shortcut icon in Radio: Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used to
|
Change next/previous radio station
|
|
 |
 |
|
Stop button is used to stop/play the music
 |
13.2.1.2 Android Auto (if equipped)
 |
 |
||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||
Connection:
|
Android Auto will connect automatically in XUV700 in 2-ways.
Below screen will appear in XUV700 infotainment system.
|
|||||||
 |
|
||||||
|
Features:
User can be able to find in-build apps in infotainment screen
By using the apps, user can make call to their contacts by using phone books.
Navigation system can be accessed to find the desired location.
Music can be played by using in build mobile app
|
|||||||
In-build Google voice assistance in infotainment screen.
 |
 |
|
Using Mahindra icon, user can able to switch from Android Auto to vehicle Home screen
|
|
 |
 |
|
Shortcut icon in Android Auto:
Shortcut icon is enabled only when Android Auto is connected to infotainment
Shortcut icon in Android Auto tile is used to access -
1. Music
|
|
 |
 |
2. Phone book
 |
 |
|
3. Navigation
|
|
 |
 |
13.2.1.3 Music
 |
|
|
|
|
Shortcut icon in Music:
Shortcut icon is used in Music tile to Change next/previous song and
 |
 |
 |
Song can be paused/played
|
13.2.1.4 Phone
 |
|
Recent call list:
 |
|
Contact Details:
 |
Contact details can easily be accessed by using this option
|
Dial:
 |
Using dial pad, we can enter new mobile number to contact a person or can find the person by tying his/her mobile number
|
SMS:
 |
While driving or other reasons user can send a SMS to desired person
|
Quick Dial:
 |
Favorites contacts can be seen in quick dial
|
Shortcut icon in Phone:
|
Shortcut icons in the tile is used to access
|
First icon will take the user to Recent Phone
|
 |
 |
Second icon will take the user to Bluetooth device list
 |
 |
Third icon will take the user to contact details of the connected mobile through infotainment
 |
 |
13.2.1.5 NAVIGATION
 |
 |
The navigation tile allows the user to open the in-built Map My India maps for navigation.
If any route is currently set up for navigation, it will show the turn-by-turn route.
Navigation works only if the user subscribes to the configured e-SIM at regular intervals
 |
 |
When the navigation screen is displayed on the infotainment, gently touch the infotainment screen once to see the destination,
settings and report on incident option.
Destination:
1. User can set the desired target by selecting the Destination option
|
|
 |
|
2. User can enter the desired destination in the search bar
|
3. Then route map will be available in screen
|
 |
 |
Settings:
|
|
User can select the settings option & use the below listed option in settings
|
 |
1. Live Traffic
2. Avoid on Route 3. Trip Type 4. Driver Assist 5. Map Display |
 |
6. Voice
7. Language
8. Map Data
9. Reset
10. About
|
Report an incident:
 |
 |
If user encounter any of the above incidents, then he/she can report the incident by using Report a Traffic Problem option
These reports help other users to show real-time traffic conditions.
GPS:
GPS navigation system provides voice guidance to the user on how to reach a given destination.
 |
 |
Shortcut icon in Navigation:
Shortcut icon in Navigation tile is used to
1. While enabling the favorite icon, infotainment will take user directly to Navigation screen
 |
|
 |
2. Can switch ON/OFF the voice by using mute button
|
3. While enabling the Navigation icon, infotainment will take user directly to Destination screen
 |
 |
13.2.1.6 Mappls Auto (If equipped)
|
|
 |
| • | Navigation in XUV700 is powered by MAPPLS AUTO. |
| • | If any route is currently set up for navigation, it will display the turn-by-turn directions. |
| • | MAPPLS AUTO functionality depends on user maintaining a subscription to the configured e-SIM at regular intervals |
13.2.1.7 Application
 |
 |
| • | The Applications tile allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications. |
| • | Touching the Applications tile will open the app drawer. |
| • | It has quick options to open News, Music & food apps. |
| • | By pressing Application tile, App Drawer screen will open automatically |
Shortcut icon in Application:
Shortcut icon in Application tile can be used to access the below features
News:
 |
 |
| 1. | India Today APP will open by pressing the NEWS icon |
| 2. | User can listen live NEWS regarding various topics (Business, Live NEWS, Top NEWS, Sports, etc.,) |
|
Travel Explorer:
|
|
 |
 |
|
1. Thrillophilia App will open by pressing the Travel Explorer icon
|
2. Users can find near by Hotels, famous locations etc., that can be explored by using Thrillophilia
|
|
Zomato:
|
|
 |
 |
|
1. Zomato App will open by pressing the food icon
|
2. User can find near by restaurants by using the above app
|
13.2.1.8 Apple Car Play (if equipped)
| • | Apple Car Play brings out the best of in-car infotainment technology by linking the user’s iPhone™ device with the Mahindra infotainment system. |
| • | Apple Car Play focuses on safety & minimizes user distraction by projecting select iPhone functionality on to the vehicle infotainment system. |
| • | It allows the user to access, and control select applications of iPhone, using various inputs on the vehicle such as touch, steering wheel controls and voice. |
| • | Examples of some applications of the Apple device that can be controlled include Music, Navigation, Phone call and Google search |
| • | It enhances the XUV700 driving experience & enables the user to stay focused on the road with simple, intuitive interfaces, integrated steering wheel controls and a powerful speech recognition. |
| • | This makes it safer and easier to interact with the phone while driving. |
 |
 |
Connection:
Enable Bluetooth in your mobile
Pair the mobile Bluetooth with XUV700, then Apple Car Play will connect automatically
Press Apple Car Play to enable the Car Play
|
|
 |
Features:
 |
User can find some in-build apps in Apple Car Play. Using the apps, user can :
- make call to their contacts by using phone books
- access Navigation system to find the desired location
- play Music by using in-build mobile app
- use Siri voice assistance (Apple phone user)
|
Using Mahindra option, user can switch from Apple Car Play to vehicle Home screen.
 |
 |
Shortcut in Apple Car Play:
Music icon in Apple Car Play tile can be used to access the music.
Shortcut icon is enabled only when Apple car play is connected to infotainment system
 |
 |
Phone icon in Apple Car Play tile can be used to access the Phone book.
 |
 |
Navigation icon in Apple Car Play tile can be used to access the Navigation.
 |
 |
13.2.2 Widget
 |
Widgets are screens that provide quick information from the AdrenoX system.
|
| • | The widgets display will be fixed in the left corner of the Fun in XUV700 screen. |
| • | The following information will be available as part of widgets |
| 1. | Clock |
| 2. | Health |
| 3. | Gallery |
| 4. | Weather |
| 5. | NEWS |
| 6. | Travel Explorer |
| 7. | Calendar |
13.2.2.1 Clock
| • | Time can be displayed in the selected area |
| • | Pressing the clock screen in widget will open the display settings on the clock. |
| • | Time can be fixed in both Analog or digital format |
 |
 |
13.2.2.2 Health
| • | Scroll down the Radio and find the Health screen in Widget |
| • | User can connect the mobile or smart watch with vehicle via Bluetooth |
| • | Whenever the device is in the Bluetooth range, then user can be able to see all the listed features |
 |
 |
13.2.2.3 Gallery
| • | Scroll down the Health screen and find the gallery screen in Widget |
| • | User can be able to see the photos/videos in gallery by press the gallery option |
 |
 |
13.2.2.4 Weather
| • | Scroll down the gallery screen and find the Weather screen in Widget |
| • | Users can view weather information by selecting the weather icon on the widget |
 |
 |
13.2.2.5 News
| • | Scroll down the Weather screen and find the NEWS screen in Widget |
| • | User can know the day-to-day news using India Today app by selecting the NEWS app in widget |
 |
 |
13.2.3 Fun in XUV700 Split Screen Functionality
 |
Users can access the Split screen by swiping left on the home screen.
|
 |
User can set the Radio, Media, Phones, and other screens by long pressing the intended tile in Split screen.
|
 |
User can set any four contents in split screen to access the features easily
|
13.2.4 Fun with XUV700 (If equipped)
 |
User can select different drive modes as per his/her convenience by using the Fun with XUV700 option.
Fun with XUV700 menu displays engine power & torque, selected drive mode, compass, a G force meter and digital lap time
|
13.2.4.1 Zip Mode (If equipped)
 |
Touch Fun with XUV700 screen & user can find the different drive mode option
|
 |
After selecting the Zip mode, swipe right side of the screen
|
 |
Then a user can find the Trip information screen
By using the Trip information, user can know the driving details such as Trip Distance, Top Speed, Average Speed, Fuel Economy
and how many times the brake pedal is pressed in the last driving cycle.
|
Above details are updated according to the last driving pattern. User can reset the Trip details.
 |
By swiping the screen to the right side then user can be able to see the lap timer option.
|
 |
Lap timer measures within how many minutes the user can reach the maximum speed (very useful in racing track and testing track)
|
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.4.2 Zap Mode (If equipped)
 |
Select Zap option in drive mode screen
|
 |
After selecting the Zap mode swipe the right side of the screen
|
 |
Then user can find the vehicle performance display screen
Vehicle performance screen consists of Engine Power, Torque, G-meter, and Compass
|
 |
By swiping the screen to the right side, user can be able to see the lap timer option
Lap timer measures within how many minutes the user can reach the maximum speed (very useful in racing track and testing track)
|
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.4.3 Zoom Mode (If equipped)
 |
Select Zoom option in drive mode screen
After selecting the Zoom mode swipe the right side of the screen
|
 |
Then user can find the vehicle performance display screen
|
 |
Vehicle performance screen consists of Engine Power, Torque, G-meter, and Compass
By swiping the screen to the right side, user can be able to see the lap timer option
Lap timer measures within how many minutes the user can reach the maximum speed (very useful in racing track and testing track)
|
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
13.2.4.4 Custom Mode (If equipped)
 |
Select Custom option in drive mode screen
After selecting the Custom mode, select configure option
Then user can find configure custom mode
|
By using the below option user can configure Engine Power, Brake, Climate, Steering Behavior, and Theme by selecting different
drive modes (Zip, Zap or Zoom mode)
 |
Swipe the screen left side for two times and again go back to drive mode screen
|
13.2.7 e-SIM (If equipped)
 |
XUV700 infotainment has inbuilt e-SIM which is used to access Zomato, Just dial, Accuweather, Horoscope, News, and some other
apps can be accessed by using the e-SIM
User can use this as a mobile network by connecting the vehicle’s Wi-Fi to mobile
Based upon OEM standards, SIM subscriptions can be varied for all variants
|
13.2.8 Fun in XUV 700 Quick Access Drawer Functionality
 |
 |
The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from up to down.
Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like Volume control, Ask Mahindra (if equipped), Roadside
Assistance, Valet Mode, Notifications, Help, Radio, Apple Car Play, Android Auto, My Drive, USB, Bluetooth, iPod, and video.
13.2.8.1 Volume Control
 |
User can increase, decrease or mute the volume by using Volume Control option
|
13.2.8.2 Ask Mahindra (if equipped)
 |
 |
 |
By operating the Ask Mahindra icon, a call will be triggered automatically from your XUV700 to Mahindra Support Centre for:
1. Explanation on features and functions.
2. Guidance or assistance for usage of in-car features.
3. Assisting customers with guiding them to nearest workshop.
|
CAUTION:
Some Infotainment features may not work when the Ask Mahindra call is in progress
|
|
13.2.8.3 RSA
 |
 |
If any abnormal condition is observed in vehicle, user can access RSA
By enabling RSA in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically to Mahindra Roadside Assistance team
13.2.8.4 Valet Mode (If equipped)
 |
 |
Allows the user to park the vehicle in a predefined location while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to
access the Valet mode will be 1234.
Once the Valet Mode is enabled,
| • | Infotainment screen will not be accessible, |
| • | The vehicle speed will not go beyond 80 Kmph, |
| • | Geofencing alert will be triggered to the user's mobile when an unknown person drives the vehicle over 5 Km. |
| • | Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode. |
| • | Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service |
13.2.8.5 Notification
 |
 |
| • | User mobile should pair with XUV700 via Bluetooth |
| • | Notification will be shown by clicking the notification icon only if the user’s mobile is paired with XUV700 |
13.2.8.6 Help
 |
 |
| • | Using Help option user can know the unknown alerts and telltale details in Owners Manual or Infotainment Manual |
13.2.8.7 Radio
 |
 |
| • | Radio option will be selected directly by using Quick access option |
| • | Once the Radio icon is selected, then Radio screen will appear in infotainment |
13.2.8.10 My Drive (if equipped)
|
By using pen drive, favorite songs can be stored in My Drive
|
Press My Drive option to enjoy the songs which is already stored in My Drive
|
 |
 |
|
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Sub woofer.
|
|
 |
 |
|
By selecting the Browse folder user can see the Favorites, Genres, Artist, Album, Songs, Composers
|
|
 |
 |
13.2.8.11 USB
 |
Media port is available below the center switch bezel where USB device can be connected.
|
User can access music, video & Photos by USB device.
 |
 |
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.
 |
 |
By selecting the Browse folder, Browse MyDrive screen will opened. User can see the Favorites, Genres, Artist, Album, Songs
& Composers.
 |
 |
13.2.8.12 Bluetooth
|
User can connect the mobile with XUV700 via Bluetooth
|
Once Mobile Bluetooth is connected with vehicle infotainment, user can play desired songs
|
 |
 |
|
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.
|
|
 |
 |
13.2.8.13 iPod
This option can be enabled only if the user have iPhone
 |
 |
|
If user have iPhone, then car play application can be disabled through iPhone settings. To play the music, connect the USB
cable to media port and play songs through mobile APP.
|
|
 |
By selecting the equalizer icon, Audio settings will be opened. User can adjust the Bass, Mid, Treble & Subwoofer.
 |
 |
By selecting the Browse folder user can see the Favorites, Genres, Artist, Album, Songs, Composers
 |
 |
13.2.8.14 Video
 |
 |
| • | When USB device is connected in Media Port, then user can play Videos. |
| • | In App drawer, select Gallery option & select the video in gallery. Video will play automatically |
| • | User can see the video in parking condition |
| • | During driving, user can see the video in infotainment up to 20 kmph speed |
13.2.9 Fun in XUV 700 App Drawer Functionality
 |
The App Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from Down to up.
The app drawer displays all the applications available in Infotainment System.
|
 |
 |
|
The App Drawer allows user to browse through available apps and folders and launch selected one.
Based on the usage of Apps, reordering will be done automatically
|
|
13.2.9.1 Add Folder
 |
 |
| • | User can select add folder and can drag the existing apps available in app drawer to New Folder |
| • | User can rename the folder as per his/her choice. |
13.2.9.2 Climate Control (If equipped)
 |
 |
| • | User can press Climate Control option and select different modes available in XUV700. |
| • | Types of modes are described below |
1. Face Mode:
 |
User can access Face mode to get direct airflow through instrument panel air vents to the front row passenger.
|
2. Face & Foot Mode:
 |
User can select Face & Foot mode to get airflow from both instrument panel air vents and footwell air vents
|
3. Foot Mode:
 |
User can select Foot mode to get airflow from footwell air vents
|
4. Foot & Defogger Mode:
 |
User can select Foot & Defogger mode to get airflow from footwell air vents & Defogger vents
Defogger vent is used to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on Front windshield.
|
5. Front Defogger Mode:
 |
User can select Front Defogger mode to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on front windshield
|
Recirculation Mode:
 |
User can select Re-circulation mode by pressing the Re-circulation mode icon
In re-circulation mode, air is re-circulated in passenger compartment If it is OFF, fresh air is supplied in passenger compartment.
|
Blower Speed Control:
 |
Blower Fan Speed can be controlled by pressing '+' or '-' button on HVAC controller.
|
Auto Mode:
 |
User can select auto mode by pressing the ‘Auto’ button on HVAC controller.
In AUTO mode, with respect to the surrounding condition, set temperature is automatically obtained. This is done by adjusting
the blower speed and fresh/recirculation mode to optimum level.
|
Smart Air Filter:
 |
Smart Air Filter is used to convert the polluted air into non polluted air
|
Seat Ventilation Control (if equipped)
The Seat Ventilation Setting accessible through Infotainment HVAC application or from footer selection of the infotainment
Launcher Screen.
Once the application has been launched, the footer selection will result in NO ACTION.
|
|
|
 |
Enable the Driver and Co-driver seat ventilation feature based on the requirement.
Once enable the seat ventilation, user will be able to modify the airflow with three different level. The default level will
be OFF.
For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like Level 3 →Level
2 → Level 1 → OFF →Level 1 → Level 2 →Level 3→ Level 2 →Level 3 → OFF
|
 |
The long press on the Seat Ventilation Icon, to turn it OFF.
Again, a short press on the same icon will enable the feature with Last stored Level.
|
Power Off:
 |
HVAC system is turned off when the user presses the power button.
Press the power button to restart the HVAC system
|
13.2.9.3 Connected Apps (If equipped)
 |
User can select Connected Apps and can see Manufacturer Update, Over The Air Surprises, Personalized Safety Alerts and Calendar.
|
 |
 |
Individual Features are explained below
Manufacturer Update
 |
User can select Manufacturer Update and enter in Manufacturer Update screen
|
Two options are available in Manufacturer Update screen
 |
1. History: Previous updates from organization can be stored in the history
|
 |
2. Advertisement: Service Offers can be shared by manufacturer by using this feature. This feature can be enabled / disabled by the user
|
Over the Air Surprise
User can select Over the air Surprise and enter to Over the air Surprise screen
 |
 |
In Over the Air Surprise, Mahindra will provide regular update to the user regarding following details:
Happy Birthday wishes to the user - Owner birth date is shown in this feature
 |
 |
Scheduled Maintenance - Last service details, can be available in this feature.
 |
 |
ADVISORY - User can know whether Android Auto is available in his/her vehicle
 |
 |
Advisory
XUV700 is loaded with lot of new features, user can explore the New Features as per his/her requirements.
There is possibility that long and repeated features can be explored in Engine OFF condition.
But, if ignition is in ON condition and vehicle is idle for days/hours, then there is chance of battery drainage.
To avoid this Mahindra had asked the user to switch ON the Engine
 |
 |
RESTORE - Once the update is done, all the details in AdrenoX Connect service have been restored.
 |
 |
UPDATE - User can be check the update in this section.
 |
 |
HAPPY DIWALI - Pushed message for the Seasons Greetings can be viewed.
 |
 |
HAPPY DUSSEHRA - Pushed message for the Seasons Greetings can be viewed.
 |
 |
Happy Birthday wishes to the user - Pushed message for Birthday Wishes can be viewed.
 |
 |
|
Personalized Safety Alert
|
|
 |
 |
Personalized Safety alert will pop-up when user drives the vehicle in over speed condition.
As a remembrance, user can customize alert voice of his / her loved ones.
When user drive the vehicle rashly voice will come & alert the user
 |
1. Settings: User can able to save the voice and can able to enable or disable the option
|
 |
2. History: Previous details are available in History section.
|
Calender
User can fix the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Reminder by using calendar
 |
 |
13.2.9.4 Documents
 |
 |
User can store the important files like License, Aadhar card, Pan card, Voter I’d , etc., in pdf format
 |
1. My Drive Documents: In this folder user can store the important details like License, Aadhar Card, Pan Card, etc.. in digital format.
|
 |
2. USB Documents: Connect the pen drive in file transfer socket and then user can access important files which are available in pen drive.
|
13.2.9.5 Download Manager
In Download Manager, user can know the applications which are available on Infotainment Systems.
 |
 |
User can select the required APP and view various details available in it.
 |
Weather - User can know the weather updates in their locality by using Weather condition app
|
 |
Travel - By using Travel explorer application user can explore nearby places or search the places as per his/her requirement.
|
 |
Others - In others user can find Connected Cars, Horoscope and Just dial applications
|
 |
News - By using NEWS app user can listen the daily NEWS
|
 |
Zomato - User can find the near by restaurants and order their foods
|
13.2.9.6 Drive Modes (If equipped)
 |
 |
In Drive mode user can be able to access four different drive modes.
| 1. | Zip mode |
| 2. | Zap mode |
| 3. | Zoom mode |
| 4. | Custom mode |
Zip mode
 |
After activating the Zip mode, the vehicle is suitable to drive in normal comfortable city condition and in traffic condition.
|
ZAP MODE:
 |
After activating the Zap mode, the user can experience the TRUE Mahindra SUV drive experience.
|
ZOOM MODE:
 |
Zoom mode can be activated by the user to drive the vehicle on highways and enjoy the thrilling driving experience.
|
CUSTOM MODE:
In Custom mode, user can configure Zip/Zap/Zoom mode functionalities for the 5-parameters i.e. Engine Power, Brakes, Climate,
Steering and Theme
 |
 |
13.2.9.7 Eco Sense (Only in MT Variant)
 |
 |
ECOSENSE assesses how a vehicle is driven and presents an Ecoscore (Avg.).
Ecoscore is calculated by monitoring key driving parameters like speed, gear selection, acceleration, unwanted engine idling
periods, frequent aggressive braking and clutch overrides.
Higher the ecoscore, better the driving habits. Higher ecoscore does not always mean better fuel economy, as fuel economy
depends on factors like prevailing traffic, load on the vehicle, road profile, number of passengers and other environmental
factors.
ECOSENSE also provides, on the infotainment screen, alerts for unwanted idling and clutch over ride. Recommendation for Gear-Shift
is provided on the cluster, enabling the users to make optimal gear selection.
ECOSENSE helps in getting a better fuel economy which in turn leads to reduced emissions and a cleaner environment.
13.2.9.8 Gallery
User can save photos & videos in the Gallery by inserting USB device in Media Port. Also, user can copy the photos & videos
in MyDrive Photos and MyDrive videos.
 |
 |
|
|
Use can select MyDrive Photos, see the list of Photos and select to see it in full screen.
Similarly, user can play the video in infotainment system.
As a safety measure, there are some limitations to play the video in infotainment.
User can see the video in parking condition
During driving, up to 20 kmph user see the video in infotainment
|
13.2.9.9 Horoscope
|
By using the Horoscope app user can view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign
|
|
 |
 |
13.2.9.11 My Drive Manager
|
Insert USB device in Media Port & open the My Drive Manager then user can copy required songs, videos, photos and documents
to the infotainment system
|
|
 |
 |
 |
Select required file from USB device & by using copy (highlighted) option, user can store the required details from USB to
the infotainment system.
|
 |
Delete content option is used to remove the unwanted files in the infotainment system
|
 |
User can store max 1.9 GB data in infotainment system.
|
13.2.9.12 My SUV Info
 |
 |
In MySUVInfo option, user can know the Vehicle Details and can store License & other certificates in digital format.
Vehicle Details
 |
 |
|
1. Vehicle Name
|
8. Number of cylinders
|
|
2. Color of the vehicle
|
9. Variant details
|
|
3. Primary User
|
10. VIN Number
|
|
4. PUC (Pollution Under Control) Expiry Date
|
11. Model
|
|
5. Last Service Date
|
12. Make
|
|
6. Engine Capacity
|
13. Insurance Expiry Date
|
|
7. Fuel Type
|
My Documents:
 |
In My Documents user can store the following details in digital format
|
13.2.9.13 New Update
 |
 |
By using NEWS app user can easily listen World NEWS, Top News, Automobile News, Business, Sports & etc.,
13.2.9.14 Owner’s Manual
 |
|
By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see XUV700 Owner's manual & Infotainment manual
13.2.9.15 Surround View System (if equipped)
 |
 |
Surround View System / 360-degree Camera View System assists the user during parking and during low speed maneuvering. Surround
View Assistance is provided with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior
mirrors.
Using this option, user can see different Surrounding views in infotainment system
Different Surrounding views details are listed below:
Front Camera 2d View
 |
This view assist the user to drive the vehicle carefully in front area.
User can see the front surroundings while maneuvering in front.
|
Rear Camera 2d View
 |
This view assists the user with Rear surrounding view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
|
Left Camera 2d View
 |
This view helps the user to see the left side view near the front tire when parking
|
Right Camera 2d View
 |
This view helps the user to see the right side view near the front tire when parking
|
Rear Bumper 2d View
 |
This view helps the user to see the objects closer to rear bumper
|
Front Bumper 2d View
 |
This view helps the user to see the object closer to front bumper
|
Bird’S Eye View
 |
The bird’s eye view/2D top view shows the view of the vehicle from a top-down view (as in right side of image) stitching all
the 4 camera images
|
Wide-Angle View / Full Screen View- 2d & 3d
Single view can be switched to wide-angle view by pressing full view icon
 |
 |
Translucent Top View
| • | The translucent (semi transparent) top view will provide the user to view the floor below the vehicle. |
| • | Gently, touch the bird’s eye view, then the infotainment view changes to semi transparent view. User can view beneath the ground which will be visible once the vehicle starts moving. |
 |
 |
3D Views
 |
Once user touches bird’s eye view/3D top view in infotainment screen, then oval ring will appear.
In oval ring, 3D view switching 8 icons will be visible. Selecting any icon will show the 3D view in icons direction.
If there is NO action from user side, then Icon will hide automatically after 5 seconds.
|
 |
 |
SVS - Settings
 |
User can access the Parking Guideline, Automatic Side View, Parking assistance & Drive video recordings by using SVS settings
|
Parking Guidelines
 |
 |
In Parking Guidelines, two modes are available i.e. Static Guideline & Dynamic Guideline.
Static Guideline indicates the placement of vehicle with respect to the parking slot.
Dynamic Guideline indicates the path that the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle position.
Color codes (Red, Yellow, Green) on the static lines helps in assessing obstacle distance [at the ground plane] from the vehicle’s
boundary.
| • | By selecting 2D view, user can see either Front View or Rear View. 2D view is the Default view. |
| • | By selecting 3D view, user can see Full View of the vehicle. |
Automatic Side View
 |
 |
| • | When Left / Right Turn Indicator is turned ON and 3D view is active, then view will switch to 3D Left / Right in Infotainment Screen |
| • | This feature can be Enabled / Disabled from SVS SETTINGS menu |
Parking Assistance:
Two types of Parking Assistances are available in XUV700
| • | Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking Assistance: |
| 1. | Choose Vertical Parking icon from SVS-Settings. Overlays will appear on either side as in image below. |
| 2. | Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that camera can have the parking slot view. |
| 3. | Chose vertical parking button from settings. Overlays will appear on either side. |
 |
 |
| • | Parallel Parking Assistance: |
| 1. | Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view, then choose Parallel Parking icon from SVS-Settings. |
| 2. | Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side |
 |
 |
Drive Video Recording:
| • | The 4 cameras installed around the vehicle captures the video and capture special event of the vehicle during driving. |
| • | Recording from SVS-DVR is possible only if micro-SD card is installed |
 |
 |
| • | Use Class 10 micro-SD card for recording the video |
| • | For detailed information on the Surround View System topic, see the Interactive Owner's Manual 360° View section which is available in Mahindra’s With You Hamesha app |
13.2.9.16 Ticker Tape
 |
 |
Ticker Tape feature helps users to track the stock prices and other financial data by providing real-time information on various
stock trades and other relevant financial data.
13.2.9.17 Travel Explorer
 |
 |
|
Travel Explorer takes the user thrillophilia app and it helps the user to find near by hotels, famous location etc.,
|
|
13.2.9.18 User Profile (If equipped)
 |
 |
|
It is a personalized profile and user can choose this option to control climate setting, preferred audio source, audio settings,
application drawer, link profile to key fob, Lock my Profile etc.
|
|
User Profile
|
|
In the given screen user have two Profile and one guest profile.
|
Configure Active Profile
 |
User can adapt person specific settings for First, Second and Guest Profiles.
|
Name
 |
User can create a distinct identity to the profile by providing a unique name.
|
Climate
 |
User can assign the comfortable climate settings according to his/her need.
|
Audio Source
 |
User can choose the preferred audio source for the profile. When preferred audio source is not available, default audio source
will be played.
|
Audio Settings
 |
User can be able to assign the favorite audio settings to the profile.
|
Screen Saver
 |
By using screen saver option, user can select the photos from gallery & make it Screen Saver.
By selecting automatic screen saver, screens can be updated automatically by M&M
|
Application Drawer
 |
In Application Drawer user can fix the apps according to the profile usage
|
Link Profile To Key Fob
 |
User can link the profile with the key fob. By using this setting, once user enter the vehicle with the desired key fob, then
all the saved settings will updated automatically.
|
Lock My Profile
 |
If lock settings is enabled by the user, then other user can’t change the saved details. Also, other user can't see the saved
user specific settings on infotainment screen.
|
13.2.10 Settings
Some settings, which are needed frequently are provided up-front as Quick Settings on Infotainment Screen.
Quick Settings
 |
 |
13.2.11 ICC (Intelli Command Center) Rotary (If equipped)
ICC Rotary have two functions in it
 |
Browse : Using ICC knob user can rotate clockwise or Anti clockwise direction to choose the option and press ICC button to
select the option
|
 |
Volume: Using ICC Knob user can rotate the ICC knob in clockwise or Anti clockwise direction to increase or decrease the volume
|
13.2.12 Touch Sound
 |
Enabling the Touch Sound will give the Touch sound, whenever user selects particular icon or app
|
13.2.13 Clock in System Off
|
|
In Home Screen, user can turn ON or turn OFF the Clock by using this option.
|
13.2.14 Reset Home Layout
 |
Home screen will revert to its default layout whenever user selects this option.
|
|
All Setting
 |
List of details available in All Settings
|
|
1. General
|
4. Audio
|
7. Vehicle
|
|
2. Display
|
5. Alexa
|
8. User Input & Feedbacks
|
|
3. Date & Time
|
6. Phone
|
9. Wifi
|
13.2.15 General
User can find below details in General settings:
Units
 |
User can select UK (Metric) and US (Imperial) to calculate the units (i.e., Km)
|
Factory Reset
|
|
If user selects 'Confirm', All settings will be restored to default factory settings
|
 |
Software Update
If Auto Download option is enabled and any update is available, then software update will happen automatically.
|
13.2.16 Display Settings
|
List of features available in settings
|
|
 |
Brightness
User can increase or decrease the brightness of Infotainment and Instrument Cluster.
|
Power and Sleep
 |
|
Clock Type
 |
User can select the digital or analog clock as per his/her choice.
This will be reflected in home screen when infotainment system goes OFF.
|
Home Layout
 |
In Home Layout, user can have the screen view as per his choice.
If another user wants to set the original settings, then the user can select reset option .
|
13.2.17 Date & Time
User can set the Date & Time by using this option.
 |
 |
Sync to GPS:
 |
Date and Time can be sync with GPS, it can be manually enabled or disabled by user
|
Time Zone
 |
By using this option user can manually fix the different time zones
|
Set Date
 |
User can set and fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY format.
|
Set Time
 |
User can set and fix the Time format either in 12 Hour or 24 Hour.
|
13.2.18 Audio Settings
Using Audio Settings, user can change the sound effects in different positions.
3D Sound
 |
 |
Immersive 3D Mode (If equipped)
Fully deep, wide and the gaze height sound stage for comfortable music listening while driving
 |
One big sound stage, with immersive feeling just like watching artist performance at premium position
Immersive sound mode provides an experience to the listener to understand the sound and music coming from speakers, which
will come from an multiple points.
|
Stage Mode (If equipped)
 |
Higher and Wider sound stage just like watching the musician's performance at the first-row seat
One big sound stage for all occupants
|
Party Mode
 |
Just like Disco Club, music will come from multi direction without sound stage (music will come from particular distance)
NO sound image localization (user can feel the special instruments like guitar, keyboard, etc.,)
|
Breezy Mode (If equipped)
 |
In Breezy Mode, all the passengers in vehicle can enjoy the music performance stage close to their seat row.
|
3D OFF (If equipped)
 |
User can hear the normal sound just like normal speakers and Sound Field Size option gets disabled when user select the 3D
OFF option
|
Sound Field Position (If equipped)
 |
User can adjust the sound according to his preferences and button center is given to get the sound balance from back to center
|
Sound Field Size (If equipped)
 |
 |
 |
This setting will provide the ambience of theatre (Large), stage (Mid) or personal music room (Small) by selecting the sound
level.
User cannot access Sound Field Size option when 3D OFF option is in OFF condition.
Equalizer (If equipped)
 |
Equalizer is provided to change BMT (Bass, Mid, Treble) settings according to preferences. Additionally, subwoofer is provided
to have more Bass
|
Digital Sound Enhancement Engine (If equipped)
 |
DSEE is a new settings which will enhance the quality of old recorded songs to DVD quality.
Compressed or low-quality music removed during the compression process (CD to MP3 format) can be restored into high range
sound by using this technology.
|
Speed Dependent Volume Control (If equipped)
 |
Speed Dependent Volume Control will automatically adjust the loudness and quality of the music according to speed of the vehicle
by removing the road noise.
|
Volume Settings
 |
User can increase or decrease the volume for the Voice recognition (Alexa & Google Assistance), Notification, Phones, Media
|
Default Audio Settings
By enabling the below settings, the Audio settings will be restored to the default settings
 |
 |
13.2.19 Alexa (if equipped)
Select Alexa App in general settings
On boarding will start with information about what is possible through Alexa
Alexa sign in screen will appear in infotainment as per below screens.
 |
 |
After that, system will generate a 6-character Authentication Code.
In your mobile/lap/tab open google chrome and sign in your amazon account or create a new login credentials using the link:
/https://www.amazon.com.code
 |
Enter the 6-digit code that you receive from the XUV700 infotainment screen
|
After registering the correct code, your mobile/lap/tab will appear the above screen
Once account is activated, user will see the guide Screen. Press done to complete login activities.
Things to Try
 |
 |
 |
 |
In Things to Try option user can find following
Getting Started, Talents, Entertainment, Weather, communication, Smart Home, news and information, Navigation, Traffic information,
Skills, List, Shopping, Question and Answers, Sports, Calendar, Movies and Show times
Contact List
 |
To make calls through Alexa, phone need to be paired and then contacts shall be uploaded to Alexa cloud when device is enabled.
|
Hands Free Listening
 |
Alexa can be invoked by either pressing PTT (Push to Talk) button in SWC (Steering Wheel Control) or simply saying “Alexa”.
To invoke Alexa through voice, setting need to be enabled.
|
Notification
 |
On any screen, whenever any notification comes, yellow dot will appear on Alexa icon
|
Request Sound
 |
Before you begin any request to Alexa, particular sound to Alexa device is customized before and after your request.
If enabled, device will play a sound before you begin or end your request.
|
Sign Out
 |
In case if you don’t want to use Alexa, you can sign out any time in settings
|
13.2.20 Phone
By using Phone option, user can enable Bluetooth settings in vehicle, check available devices, add device, pair device using
BT, fix the ringtone and can alter SMS settings.
 |
 |
Bluetooth
 |
User enable or disable Bluetooth connection according to his/her need
|
Device List
 |
User can view the list of devices, already connected to vehicle infotainment
|
Add Devices
 |
By using this option, user can find the nearby devices.
|
Bluetooth Discoverability
 |
When BT Discoverability option is pressed, vehicle's Bluetooth device will be shown to nearby devices for 90 seconds.
Once any mobile device is connected, Bluetooth functionalities are available.
|
Ring Tone
 |
User can fix the ringtones for incoming calls
|
SMS Settings
Enable Sms Signature:
 |
User can pre-define a small text that will appear as a signature at the bottom of every text message.
Whenever new message is getting composed or reply is getting sent, signature texts will appear automatically.
|
Configure Sms Signature:
 |
User can add a text in bottom that this message is send from my car.
|
Enable Sms Alert:
 |
Incoming SMS can be seen by enabling this option in vehicle
|
Configure Auto Reply Options:
 |
While driving, user can fix a message, I’m in driving or I’ll call you back.
|
Sms Readout:
 |
When user's phone is connected with ALEXA & all the contacts are synced with paired Alexa device, then SMS Readout option
is enabled and Alexa can read the SMS.
|
13.2.21 Vehicle Settings (If equipped)
User can find the below option by selecting the Vehicle settings option
 |
 |
Access
 |
User can see following features on XUV700 by using access option
|
Selection Unlock
 |
While activating this option only the driver door can be unlocked
|
Easy Entry & Easy Exit
 |
Driver seat can be adjusted automatically during entry & exit
|
Service Mode
 |
By enabling this all the remote functions in XUV700 will get deactivated
|
Lights & Illumination
 |
Daytime Running Lamp:
By enabling this option DRL will be activated automatically for better visibility
|
13.2.22 User Input & Feedback (If equipped)
User can find the below options by using User Input & Feedback
 |
 |
ICC Rotary Knob
 |
By using ICC Rotary Knob, user can select two functions :
Volume: By enabling this, user can adjust the volume by rotating the ICC Knob
Browse:
1. By enabling this, user can shift the app by rotating the knob either in clockwise or in Anti-clockwise direction
2. User can select the desired app by pressing the ICC knob
|
Screen Touch Feedback
 |
Button Touch Sound: By enabling this user can hear the touch sound while selecting any application
|
Voice Alerts
 |
Voice Alerts: By enabling this, user can give voice commands through Alexa (Alexa: Open Skyroof, Alexa: Close Skyroof, etc...)
|
13.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
| 1. | How to connect phone via Bluetooth in Infotainment? User can connect Bluetooth using any of the below methods, in Bluetooth settings.
Add device: Kindly ensure, Mobile device should be in bluetooth settings screen to accept the connection
Bluetooth discoverability: Kindly ensure, Mobile device start scan after discoverability is turned On
|
| 2. | My contacts are taking time to load in IVI? Based on the Mobile device and number of contacts, loading time may vary from few seconds to few minutes
|
| 3. | Bluetooth Music is not playing in Infotainment? After connecting mobile device to bluetooth, user need to select his device for media in device list and then select bluetooth
music source in Infotainment to Play music.
|
| 4. | Few Phone Contacts are not visible in Infotainment Screen? Ensure that your phone book contacts do not have special characters before their name. If there are such contacts, please
rename them.
|
| 5. | I can’t Accept or decline Whatsapp call from IVI? IVI will support bluetooth phone voice call and supportability of Whatsapp, MS Team call depends on the controls provided
by Mobile device/app to Infotainment
|
| 6. | During active call, I’m getting Navigation Prompts? During call, Navigation prompts will still come so user don’t miss any direction. User can adjust the volume of navigation
prompts as required
|
| 7. | Next /Previous, fast forward/rewind etc. controls not working for Bluetooth music? The availability of the features/control is dependent on the Bluetooth version of phone device and music application used
in phone.
|
| 8. | While playing USB song album art not displaying? Album art will display in the screen, only if the song has album art information
|
| 9. | While playing songs from USB, few files are getting skipped? If the Infotainment system comes across a corrupt music track in media source, the system might skip to next music track in
the media source.
|
| 10. | Date & Time in my Infotainment is Incorrect? User can Sync to GPS or manually set Date & time in settings. After selecting Sync to GPS, need to drive vehicle few Kms in
open sky to ensure proper date and time based on the time zone selected.
|
| 11. | Sources are disabled in QAD? Source will be active only when device is connected e.g., for USB, Pendrive should be connected.
|
| 12. | Can I reduce the Navigation Volume? Yes, user can adjust Navigation or other source volume, in Audio Settings.
|
| 13. | Not able to control Volume using ICC? User need to select Volume instead of Browse in ICC rotary Quick settings.
|
| 14. | Alexa not responding to my query? Few of the Alexa In car control commands might not work based on the vehicle variant (AC, Window, Sunroof & etc.,).
Also Alexa might not hear your query, in case background music or noise is High.
|
| 15. | How to connect Alexa? Step 1: Click on the settings button in Infotainment Home Screen
Step 2: Click and open Alexa icon
Step 3:Click on the “Get started” button to get the code
Step 4:Provide sometime to system to fetch code from internet.
Step 5: Infotainment will display code to activate.
Step 6 & 7: Open mobile browser and Go to url : www.amazon.com/code and login to your amazon account(If new user please create amazon
account). Enter the code seen in the screen in the box provided and click on continue button.
Step 8:Once login is successfully user will see screen with “Done” button. Press “Done” to complete.
|
| 16. | What all vehicle related commands I can use for Alexa? Following are vehicle specific commands that user can use based on the vehicle variant
In car controls (Works only inside the car with or without internet connection)
|
| 17. | What are all different Online commands categories Alexa Support? Following are the Online command categories for Alexa (Works only with internet connection inside the car)
|
| 18. | How to use Mahindra Alexa custom skills for XUV700 ? Prerequisite –
Step 1:
 Step 2:
Click on ‘In-Home Alexa’ under the Settings menu
 Step 3:
 Step 4:
 Step 5:
 Step 6:
 Step 7:
Step 8:
 Step 9:
 Step 10:
Click on ‘Manage account permissions’
 Step 11:
 Step 12:
Once permissions are granted the following screen will be displayed.
 Step 13:
Once this is done, user can experience or use the Remote Commands through Alexa enabled devices
|
| 19. | How to navigate in Owner’s Manual App? User can go to required page, by typing the page number based on the Table of Contents in the header bar and then press Done
as shown below.
|
| 20. | Whether ICC Switch control will work on Documents? User are advised to use touch for Document reading. ICC control will not work on Documents and Apps like Owner’s Manual.
|
Setting Prepared Music Streaming Services for Playing Music through Alexa
Step 1:
| • | Log in to the Amazon Alexa App using the same Amazon ID which was previously used to activate Alexa in the infotainment (Refer SI-00789 for details) |
| • | Click on the ‘More’ button at the bottom of the screen |
Step 2:
Click on ‘Settings’ option to access the app settings
Step 3:
| • | Under the settings page, click on ‘Music & Podcasts’ under the ALEXA PREFERNECES to change the default services |
Step 4:
| • | Amazon Music would be preselected as Default Services |
| • | Click on the ‘Default Services’ option |
In case music streaming services ‘Gaana’, ‘Hungama Music’, ‘Spotify’ etc. are not listed under SERVICES user needs to first
link these services to the Amazon Alexa.
A. Link Alexa to Apple Music, Apple Podcast, Spotify or JioSaavn - Click on the add icon alongside the ‘Link New Service’
to Link Alexa to these music services
B. Link Alexa to Gaana or Hungama Music – Enable Gaana & Hungama Music skills from the ‘Skills and Games’ section of the Alexa
app first.
Step 5:
| • | Under MUSIC, click on ‘Change’ button to change the default services from Amazon music to user’s preferred choice |
Step 6:
| • | Select the preferred music services from the list to set as default for Alexa |
Once the default music services are selected, Alexa will use this to play music whenever user gives the request as “Alexa,
play music” across the ecosystem including the XUV700’s infotainment.
13.4 Appendix
Abbreviations
|
Acronym |
Description |
|---|---|
|
BT
|
Blue tooth
|
|
SWC
|
Steering Wheel control
|
|
ICC
|
Intelli Command Control
|
|
IVI
|
In Vehicle Infotainment
|